Dukane Projector 8944 User Manual

LCD Projector  
Model 8944  
USER’S MANUAL  
401-8944-00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P8r9oje4c4tor  
User's Manual – Operating Guide  
Thank you for purchasing this projector.  
WARNING Before using this product, please read this manual to  
ensure the proper use of this product. After reading, store in a safe place  
for future reference.  
About this manual  
Various symbols are used in this manual. The meanings of these symbols are  
described below.  
WARNING This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly  
result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling.  
CAUTION This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly  
result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect  
handling.  
Please refer to the pages written following this symbol.  
NOTE • The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.  
• The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual.  
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted  
without express written consent.  
Trademark acknowledgment  
• Mac is registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
• VESA and SVGA are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association.  
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.  
is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc.  
• WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.  
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Content  
Content  
About this manual                    1 (EASY MENU continued . . . . . . . . . ꢁ6)  
,
Content                                     2  
Projector features                    3  
Keystone  
, Keystone  
Picture mode,  
Brightness, Contrast, Color, Tint, Sharpness,  
Whisper, Mirror, Reset, Filter time,  
Language, Go to Advanced Menu...  
PICTURE menu                       27  
Brightness, Contrast, Gamma, Color temp,  
Color, Tint, Sharpness, Active iris, My memory  
Preparations                             3  
Contents of package . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
Fastening the lens cover . . . . . . . . . .3  
Part names                               4  
Projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Rear panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Setting up                                 7  
Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
Adjusting the projector's elevator . . .9  
Using the security bar and slot . . . . .9  
IMAGE menu                           30  
Aspect, Over scan, V position, H position,  
H
phase, H size, Auto adjust execute  
INPUT menu                           32  
Progressive, Video nr, 3d-ycs,  
Color space, Component, Video format,  
Mꢀ-d, Frame lock, Rgb in, Resolution  
Connecting your devices. . . . . . . . .ꢀ0 SETUP menu                           36  
Inserting an SD car and  
Auto keystone  
execute,  
USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀꢁ Keystone  
How to use the slot cover lock. . . . .ꢀ3 Mirror  
Connecting power supply . . . . . . . .ꢀ3  
,
Keystone , Whisper,  
AUDIO menu                           38  
Remote control                       14 Volume, Treble, Bass, Srs wow,  
Laser pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀ4 Speaker, Audio  
Putting batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀ4  
SCREEN menu                        39  
About the remote control signal. . . .ꢀ5  
Language, Menu position, Blank,  
Changing the frequency of remote  
Start up, MyScreen, MyScreen Lock,  
control signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀ5  
Message, Source name  
Using as a wired remote control . . .ꢀ6  
OPTION menu                         43  
Using as a  
Auto search, Auto keystone  
Auto on, Auto off, Lamp time,  
,
simple PC mouse & keyboard . . .ꢀ6  
Power on/off                           17  
Turning on the power. . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀ7  
Turning off the power. . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀ7  
Filter time, My button, Service,  
Security  
MIU menu                               54  
Live mode, Pc-less presentation, e-shot,  
Setup, Information, Service  
Maintenance                           59  
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6ꢀ  
Internal clock battery . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Other care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Troubleshooting                     65  
Related messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Regarding the indicator lamps. . . . .66  
Phenomena that may be easy  
Operating                               18  
Adjusting the volume. . . . . . . . . . . .ꢀ8  
Temporarily muting the sound . . . . .ꢀ8  
Selecting an input signal . . . . . . . . .ꢀ8  
Searching an input signal . . . . . . . .ꢀ9  
Selecting an aspect ratio. . . . . . . . .ꢀ9  
Adjusting the zoom and focus . . . . .ꢁ0  
Adjusting the lens shift . . . . . . . . . .ꢁ0  
Using the automatic adjustment feature . .ꢁ0  
Adjusting the position . . . . . . . . . . .ꢁꢀ  
Correcting the keystone distortions.ꢁꢀ  
Using the magnify feature . . . . . . . .ꢁꢁ  
Freezing the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . .ꢁꢁ  
Temporarily blanking the screen . . .ꢁ3  
Using the menu function . . . . . . . . .ꢁ4  
to be mistaken for machine defects . .68  
Warranty and after-service      71  
Specifications                         71  
EASY MENU                            25  
Technical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19  
Network Function Section . . . . . . 1-83  
Aspect, Auto keystone  
execute,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Projector features / Preparations  
Projector features  
This projector is used to project various picture signals onto a screen. This  
projector requires only a minimal amount of space for installation and can produce  
a large projected image from even a short distance.  
Preparations  
Contents of package  
Your projector should come with the items indicated on the description sheet.  
Contact your dealer immediately if anything is missing.  
NOTE • Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment. Be sure  
to use the original packing materials when moving the projector. Use special  
caution for the lens.  
Fastening the lens cover  
To avoid losing the lens cover, please fasten the lens cover to the projector using  
the included strap.  
Strap hole  
Fix the strap to the strap hole of the lens  
cover.  
ꢀ.  
Put one side of the strap into the groove on  
the rivet.  
ꢁ.  
Bottom  
Push the rivet into the rivet hole.  
3.  
Rivet hole  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part names  
Part names  
Projector  
(6)  
(5)  
(4)  
HOT!  
(ꢀ)  
(3)  
(7)  
(ꢀ)  
(ꢀꢀ)  
(ꢀ) Speakers (x 4) ( 38).  
(ꢁ) Focus ring ( 20)  
(ꢁ0)  
(3) Zoom ring ( 20)  
(ꢁ)  
(8)  
(ꢀ5)  
HOT!  
(4) Lamp cover ( 59)  
The lamp unit is inside.  
(5) Lens shift cover ( 20)  
(6) Horizontal lens shift dial ( 20)  
(7) Vertical lens shift dial ( 20)  
(8) Front cover  
(ꢀꢁ)  
(ꢀ4)  
(ꢀꢀ)  
(9)  
(9) Lens ( 64)  
(ꢀ0) Lens cover ( 3)  
(ꢀ3)  
(ꢀ0)  
(ꢀꢁ)  
(ꢀ9)  
(ꢀꢀ) Remote sensors (x 3) ( 15)  
(ꢀꢁ)  
(ꢀ7)  
(ꢀꢁ) Elevator feet (x ꢁ) ( 9)  
(ꢀ6)  
(ꢀ3) Elevator knobs (x ꢁ) ( 9)  
(ꢀꢁ)  
(ꢀ4) Filter cover ( 61)  
The air filter and intake vent are  
inside.  
(ꢀ5) Exhaust vents  
(ꢀ6) Intake vents  
(ꢀ3)  
(ꢀ7) Rivet hole ( 3)  
(ꢀ8) Handle  
(ꢀ9) Battery cover ( 63)  
(ꢁ0)  
(ꢁ0) Control panel ( 5)  
(ꢀꢀ)  
(ꢁꢀ) Rear panel ( 5)  
(ꢀ)  
(ꢁꢀ)  
(ꢀ8)  
(ꢀ)  
WARNING HOT! : Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust  
vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot.  
►Do not look into the lens or vents while the lamp is on, since the strong light  
is not good for your eyes.  
►Do not grab the front cover to hold the projector up, since the projector may  
drop down.  
►Do not handle the elevator knobs without holding the projector, since the  
projector may drop down.  
CAUTION ►Maintain normal ventilation to prevent the projector from  
heating up. Do not cover, block or plug up the vents. Do not place anything that  
can stick or be sucked to the vents, around the intake vents. Clean the air filter  
periodically.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part names  
(6)  
(5)  
(4)  
Control panel  
(ꢀ) STANDBY/ON button ( 17)  
(ꢁ) MENU button ( 24)  
It consists of four cursor buttons.  
(3) INPUT button ( 18)  
(4) POWER indicator ( 17)  
(5) TEMP indicator ( 66)  
(6) LAMP indicator ( 66)  
(ꢀ)  
(ꢁ)  
(3)  
Rear panel  
(ꢀ) Shutdown switch ( 68)  
(ꢁ) Security slot ( 9)  
(3) Security bar ( 9)  
(4) AC inlet ( 13)  
(ꢁꢀ)  
(ꢁꢁ)  
(ꢀ)  
(ꢁ)  
(8)  
(5) Power switch ( 17)  
(ꢀ4) (ꢀ3) (ꢀ7) (6) (7) (ꢁ0) (ꢀ8)(9) (ꢀ9)  
(6) RGBꢀ port ( 10)  
(7) RGBꢁ port ( 10)  
LAN  
(8) CONTROL port ( 10)  
SD CARD  
AUX I/O  
DC 5V 0.5A  
(9) Mꢀ-D port ( 10)  
RGB  
OUT  
RGB1  
CB/PB  
RGB2  
M1-D  
Y
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
VIDEO  
(ꢀ0) VIDEO port ( 10)  
CR/PR  
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
(3.5Φ)  
(ꢀꢀ) S-VIDEO port ( 10)  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
R
L
CONTROL  
AUDIO IN  
3
AUDIO IN  
4
AC IN  
(ꢀꢁ) COMPONENT  
I
O
(Y, CB/PB, CR/PR) ports ( 10)  
(ꢀ3) AUDIO INꢀ port ( 10)  
(ꢀ4) AUDIO INꢁ port ( 10)  
(ꢀ5) AUDIO IN3 (R/L) ports ( 10)  
(ꢀ6) AUDIO IN4 (R/L) ports ( 10)  
(ꢀ0) (ꢀꢀ) (ꢀ5) (ꢀ6)(ꢀꢁ)  
(5) (4)  
(3)  
(ꢀ7) RGB OUT port ( 10)  
(ꢀ8) AUDIO OUT port ( 10)  
(ꢀ9) REMOTE CONTROL port ( 10)  
(ꢁ0) LAN port ( 10)  
(ꢁꢀ) SD card slot cover ( 12)  
The SD card slot is inside.  
(ꢁꢁ) AUX I/O port ( 12)  
CAUTION ►Do not use the security bar and the security slot to prevent the  
projector from falling down, since it is not designed for it.  
►Use the shutdown switch only when the projector is not turned off by normal  
procedure, since pushing this switch stops operation of the projector without  
cooling it down.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part names  
(ꢁ)  
(ꢀ)  
Remote control  
(7)  
(4)  
LASER  
INDICATOR  
(8)  
(3)  
(ꢀ) Laser pointer ( 14)  
STANDBY/ON  
VIDEO  
RGB  
It is a beam outlet.  
(ꢁ) LASER INDICATOR ( 14)  
(3) LASER button ( 14)  
(4) STANDBY/ON button ( 17)  
(ꢀ7)  
(ꢁ6)  
(ꢀꢀ)  
BLANK  
LASER  
(5) VOLUME button ( 18)  
(6) MUTE button ( 18)  
(7) VIDEO button ( 19)  
(ꢁ7)  
(ꢁꢀ)  
(ꢁ3)  
(ꢁ9)  
(ꢁ4)  
(ꢀ0)  
(ꢀ8)  
(5)  
(8) RGB button ( 18)  
ASPECT  
(9) SEARCH button ( 19)  
PUSH  
ENTER  
(ꢁꢁ)  
(ꢁ8)  
(ꢁ0)  
(ꢁ5)  
(ꢀꢁ)  
(ꢀ4)  
(ꢀ5)  
(ꢀ6)  
(ꢀ3)  
(ꢀ0) AUTO button ( 20)  
PAGE UP  
ESC  
PAGE DOWN  
RESET  
(ꢀꢀ) ASPECT button ( 19)  
MENU  
AUTO  
(ꢀꢁ) POSITION button ( 21)  
POSITION  
(ꢀ3) KEYSTONE button ( 21)  
(ꢀ4) MAGNIFY - ON button ( 22)  
MAGNIFY  
ON  
MY BUTTON  
1
VOLUME  
MUTE  
(ꢀ5) MAGNIFY - OFF button ( 22)  
OFF  
2
(6)  
(9)  
(ꢀ9)  
(ꢀ6) FREEZE button ( 22)  
FREEZE  
KEYSTONE  
SEARCH  
(ꢀ7) BLANK button ( 23)  
(ꢀ8) MY BUTTON - ꢀ button ( 45)  
(ꢀ9) MY BUTTON - ꢁ button ( 45)  
(30)  
(ꢁ0) MENU button ( 24)  
(ꢁꢀ) Lever switch ( 24) : acting 3 functions as below.  
Cursor button ▲ : to slide toward the side marked ▲.  
Cursor button ▼ : to slide toward the side marked ▼.  
ENTER button : to push down the center point.  
(22) Cursor button ◄ ( 24)  
(23) Cursor button ► ( 24)  
Back of  
the remote control  
(3ꢁ)  
(ꢁ4) RESET button ( 24)  
(ꢁ5) ESC button ( 24)  
(ꢁ6) Mouse left button ( 16)  
(ꢁ7) Mouse right button ( 16)  
(ꢁ8) PAGE UP button ( 16)  
(ꢁ9) PAGE DOWN button ( 16)  
(30) Wired remote control port ( 16)  
(3ꢀ) Battery cover ( 14)  
(33)  
(3ꢁ) Battery holder ( 14)  
(33) Frequency switch ( 15)  
WARNING ►Do not look into the beam outlet and  
point the beam at people and pets while pressing the  
LASER button, since the beam is not good for eyes.  
CAUTION ►Note that the laser beam may result  
in hazardous radiation exposure. Use the laser pointer  
only for pointing on the screen.  
(3ꢀ)  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
Setting up  
Install the projector according to the environment and manner the projector will be  
used in.  
WARNING Place the projector in a stable horizontal position. If the  
projector falls or is knocked over it could cause injury and/or damage to the  
projector. Using a damaged projector could then result in fire and/or electric  
shock.  
• Do not place the projector on an unstable, slanted or vibrational surface such  
as a wobbly or inclined stand.  
• Do not place the projector on its side, front or rear position.  
• Consult with your dealer before a special installation such as suspending from  
a ceiling.  
►Place the projector in a cool place, and ensure that there is sufficient  
ventilation. The high temperature of the projector could cause fire, burns and/or  
malfunction of the projector.  
• Do not stop-up, block or otherwise cover the projector's vents.  
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides of the projector and other  
objects such as walls.  
• Do not place the projector on metallic thing or anything weak in heat.  
• Do not place the projector on carpet, cushions or bedding.  
• Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as  
heaters.  
• Do not place anything near the projector lens or vents, or on top of the  
projector.  
• Do not place anything that may be sucked into or stick to the vents on the  
bottom of the projector. This projector has some intake vents also on the  
bottom.  
►Do not place the projector anyplace where it may get wet. Getting the  
projector wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause fire, electric shock  
and/or malfunction of the projector.  
• Do not place the projector in a bathroom or the outdoors.  
• Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector.  
CAUTION ►Avoid placing the projector in smoky, humid or dusty place.  
Placing the projector in such places could cause fire, electric shock and/or  
malfunction of the projector.  
• Do not place the projector near humidifiers, smoking spaces or a kitchen.  
►Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector's  
remote sensor.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
Arrangement  
Refer to the illustrations and tables below to determine screen size and projection distance.  
The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen: ꢀ0ꢁ4×768  
(a) Screen size (diagonal)  
(b) Projection distance (±ꢀ0%)  
(c) Screen height (±ꢀ0%), when the vertical lens shift ( 20) is set full upward.  
On a horizontal  
surface  
(b)  
(a)  
(c) up  
(c) down  
Suspended from  
the ceiling  
(c) up  
(a)  
(c) down  
• Keep a space of 30 cm or more  
between the sides of the projector  
and other objects such as walls.  
• Consult with your dealer before  
a special installation such as  
suspending from a ceiling.  
(b)  
4 : 3 screen  
ꢀ6 : 9 screen  
(a) Screen  
size  
(b) Projection distance  
[m (inch)]  
min. max.  
(c) Screen height  
(b) Projection distance  
(c) Screen height  
[cm (inch)]  
[m (inch)]  
min.  
[cm (inch)]  
[inch (m)]  
down  
up  
max.  
down  
-ꢀ (0)  
up  
30 (0.8) 0.9 (35) ꢀ.ꢀ (4ꢁ)  
40 (ꢀ.0) ꢀ.ꢁ (47) ꢀ.4 (57)  
60 (ꢀ.5) ꢀ.8 (7ꢀ) ꢁ.ꢁ (86)  
ꢀ.0 (38) ꢀ.ꢁ (46)  
5
(ꢁ)  
(ꢁ)  
(4)  
4ꢀ (ꢀ6)  
39 (ꢀ5)  
6
9
55 (ꢁꢁ) ꢀ.3 (5ꢀ) ꢀ.6 (6ꢁ) -ꢁ (-ꢀ) 5ꢀ (ꢁ0)  
8ꢁ (3ꢁ) ꢁ.0 (78) ꢁ.4 (94) -ꢁ (-ꢀ) 77 (30)  
96 (38) ꢁ.3 (9ꢀ) ꢁ.8 (ꢀꢀ0) -3 (-ꢀ) 90 (35)  
70 (ꢀ.8) ꢁ.ꢀ (83) ꢁ.6 (ꢀ00) ꢀꢀ (4)  
80 (ꢁ.0) ꢁ.4 (96) ꢁ.9 (ꢀꢀ5) ꢀꢁ (5) ꢀꢀ0 (43) ꢁ.6 (ꢀ04) 3.ꢁ (ꢀꢁ6) -3 (-ꢀ) ꢀ03 (4ꢀ)  
90 (ꢁ.3) ꢁ.7 (ꢀ08) 3.3 (ꢀ30) ꢀ4 (5) ꢀꢁ3 (49) 3.0 (ꢀꢀ7) 3.6 (ꢀ4ꢀ) -4 (-ꢀ) ꢀꢀ6 (46)  
ꢀ00 (ꢁ.5) 3.0 (ꢀꢁ0) 3.7 (ꢀ44) ꢀ5 (6) ꢀ37 (54) 3.3 (ꢀ3ꢀ) 4.0 (ꢀ57) -4 (-ꢁ) ꢀꢁ9 (5ꢀ)  
ꢀꢁ0 (3.0) 3.7 (ꢀ44) 4.4 (ꢀ74) ꢀ8 (7) ꢀ65 (65) 4.0 (ꢀ57) 4.8 (ꢀ89) -5 (-ꢁ) ꢀ54 (6ꢀ)  
ꢀ50 (3.8) 4.6 (ꢀ8ꢀ) 5.5 (ꢁꢀ7) ꢁ3 (9) ꢁ06 (8ꢀ) 5.0 (ꢀ97) 6.0 (ꢁ37) -6 (-ꢁ) ꢀ93 (76)  
ꢁ00 (5.ꢀ) 6.ꢀ (ꢁ4ꢀ) 7.4 (ꢁ9ꢀ) 30 (ꢀꢁ) ꢁ74 (ꢀ08) 6.7 (ꢁ63) 8.0 (3ꢀ7) -8 (-3) ꢁ57 (ꢀ0ꢀ)  
ꢁ50 (6.4) 7.7 (30ꢁ) 9.ꢁ (364) 38 (ꢀ5) 343 (ꢀ35) 8.4 (3ꢁ9) ꢀ0.ꢀ (396) -ꢀ0 (-4) 3ꢁꢁ (ꢀꢁ7)  
300 (7.6) 9.ꢁ (363) ꢀꢀ.ꢀ (437) 46 (ꢀ8) 4ꢀꢀ (ꢀ6ꢁ) ꢀ0.0 (395) ꢀꢁ.ꢀ (476) -ꢀꢁ (-5) 386 (ꢀ5ꢁ)  
350 (8.9) ꢀ0.8 (4ꢁ4) ꢀ3.0 (5ꢀ0) 53 (ꢁꢀ) 480 (ꢀ89) ꢀꢀ.7 (46ꢁ) ꢀ4.ꢀ (556) -ꢀ5 (-6) 450 (ꢀ77)  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
Adjusting the projector's elevator  
When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to the left or right, use the  
elevator feet to place the projector horizontally.  
Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to project at  
a suitable angle to the screen, elevating the front side of the  
ꢀqꢁ  
projector within 8 degrees.  
This projector has ꢁ elevator feet and ꢁ elevator knobs. An elevator foot is  
adjustable while pulling up the elevator knob on the same side as it.  
ꢀ. Holding the projector, pull the elevator knobs up to loose the elevator feet.  
ꢁ. Position the front side of the projector to the desired height.  
3. Release the elevator knobs in order to lock the elevator feet.  
4. After making sure that the elevator feet are locked, put the projector gently.  
If necessary, the elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise  
adjustments. Hold the projector when twisting the feet.  
5.  
To loose an elevator foot,  
pull up the elevator knob  
on the same side as it.  
To nely adjust, twist  
the foot.  
CAUTION ►Do not handle the elevator knobs without holding the projector,  
since the projector may drop down.  
►Do not tilt the projector other than it elevating its front within 8 degrees using  
the adjuster feet. A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause  
malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables, or the projector itself.  
Using the security bar and slot  
Security bar  
A commercial anti-theft chain or wire up to ꢀ0 mm in  
diameter can be attached to the security bar on the  
projector.  
Also this product has the security slot for the Kensington  
lock.  
Anti-theft chain or wire  
For details, see the manual of the security tool.  
WARNING ►Do not use the security bar and the  
security slot to prevent the projector from falling down,  
since it is not designed for it.  
Security slot  
NOTE The security bar and the security slot are not  
comprehensive theft prevention measures. They are intended  
to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
Connecting your devices  
Be sure to read the manuals for devices before connecting them to the projector.  
Make sure that all the devices are suitable to be connected with this product, and  
prepare the cables required to connect.  
Please refer to the following illustrations to connect them.  
PC  
LAN  
AUDIO OUT  
RGB OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
RS-232C  
RGB OUT  
M1-D  
Mꢀ-D  
signal  
source  
RGB IN  
Monitor  
LASER  
INDICATOR  
LAN  
AUX I/O  
Remote  
control  
DC 5V 0.5A  
BLANK  
LASER  
ASPECT  
PUSH ENTER  
RGB  
OUT  
RGB1  
RGB2  
M1-D  
Y
CB/PB  
VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
CR/PR  
REMOTE  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
OUT  
CONTROL  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
3
AUDIO IN  
4
CONTROL  
Speakers  
AUDIO IN  
Y
CB/PB  
CR/PR  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO IN OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO IN OUT  
S-VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO IN OUT  
VCR/DVD player  
WARNING ►Do not disassemble or modify the projector.  
►Be careful not to damage the cables, and do not use damaged cables.  
CAUTION ►Turn off all devices and unplug their power cords prior to  
connecting them to projector. Connecting a live device to the projector may  
generate extremely loud noises or other abnormalities that may result in  
malfunction or damage to the device and the projector.  
►Use appropriate accessory or otherwise designed cables. Ask your dealer  
about non-accessory cables which may have to be of a specific length or  
equipped with a core. For cables with a core only at one end, connect the end  
with the core to the projector.  
►Make sure that devices are connected to the correct ports. An incorrect  
connection may result in malfunction or damage to the device and the projector.  
ꢀ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
Connecting your devices (continued)  
NOTE • Be sure to read the manuals for devices before connecting them to the  
projector, and make sure that all the devices are suitable to be connected with this  
product. Before connecting to a PC, check the signal level, the signal timing, and the  
resolution.  
- Do not connect LAN port to any network that might have the excessive voltage.  
- Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector.  
- Some PCs have multiple screen display modes that may include some signals which  
are not supported by this projector.  
- Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA (ꢀ600Xꢀꢁ00),  
the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution before being displayed.  
The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and  
the projector panel are identical.  
• While connecting, make sure that the shape of the cable's connector fits the port to  
connect with. And be sure to tighten the screws on connectors with screws.  
• When connecting a laptop PC to the projector, be sure to activate the PC’s external  
RGB output. (Set the laptop PC to CRT display or to simultaneous LCD and CRT  
display.) For details on how this is done, please refer to the instruction manual of the  
corresponding laptop PC.  
• When the picture resolution is changed on a computer depending on an input,  
automatic adjustment function may take some time and may not be completed. In this  
case, you may not be able to see a check box to select “Yes/No” for the new resolution  
on Windows. Then the resolution will go back to the original. It might be recommended  
to use other CRT or LCD monitors to change the resolution.  
• In some cases, this projector may not display a proper picture or display any picture on  
screen. For example, automatic adjustment may not function correctly with some input  
signals. An input signal of composite sync or sync on G may confuse this projector, so  
the projector may not display a proper picture.  
• The Mꢀ-D port of this model is compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content  
Protection) and therefore capable of displaying a video signal from HDCP compatible  
DVD players or the like.  
About Plug-and-Play capability  
Plug-and-Play is a system composed of a computer, its operating system and peripheral  
equipment (i.e. display devices). This projector is VESA DDC ꢁB compatible. Plug-and-  
Play can be used by connecting this projector to a computer that is VESA DDC (display  
data channel) compatible.  
Take advantage of this feature by connecting an RGB cable to the RGBꢀ port (DDC  
ꢁB compatible). Plug-and-Play may not work properly if any other type of connection is  
attempted.  
• Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plug-and-Play  
monitor.  
ꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
Inserting an SD card and USB memory  
When using the projector with a wireless LAN please insert the included wireless  
network card. When using a commercial SD memory card in order to view images  
insert the SD memory card in the same manner. And when using a commercial  
USB memory in order to view images insert the USB memory to the AUX I/O port.  
See this “User's Manual - Network Function Section” for information on using either  
type of card.  
Wireless  
communication  
AUX I/O port  
LAN  
RGB OUT  
Wireless  
communication  
USB  
memory  
Insert the Wireless  
network card  
SD card slot  
LAN  
AUX I/O  
DC 5V 0.5A  
RGB  
OUT  
RGB1  
RGB2  
M1-D  
Y
CB/PB  
VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
CR/PR  
REMOTE  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
OUT  
CONTROL  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
3
AUDIO IN  
4
CONTROL  
Angled corner  
ꢀ. Make sure the projector’s power switch is OFF.  
Remove the SD card slot cover. Pull the cover forward, pushing slightly its  
edge up, to remove it from the projector.  
ꢁ.  
3.  
Insert the SD card. Slowly insert the SD card completely into the SD card  
slot. Make sure the angled corner of the SD card is facing the right side (AUX  
I/O port side) of the projector while inserting.  
Replace the SD card slot cover. Replace the cover by reversing the procedure  
used when removing the cover.  
4.  
NOTE • When using the projector with a wired LAN, please remove the  
wireless network card.  
• Before removing the SD card or USB memory, be sure to perform the  
(
58)  
.
REMOVE procedure using the SERVICE menu under the MIU menu  
IMPORTANT NOTE: To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance  
requirements, the antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide  
a separation distance of at least ꢁ0 cm from all persons and must not be co-  
llocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  
ꢀꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
How to use the slot cover lock  
SD CARD  
SD CARD  
Open the slot cover lock, and insert it into the  
locking a slot.  
ꢀ.  
Close the slot cover lock slowly, and attach a  
padlock or combination lock to the slot cover  
lock.  
ꢁ.  
Connecting power supply  
ꢀ. Connect the connector of the power cord to the AC inlet of the projector.  
ꢁ. Firmly plug the power cord's plug into the outlet.  
AC inlet  
Connector of the power cord  
to the outlet  
WARNING Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord, as  
incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and/or electrical shock.  
• Only use the power cord that came with the projector. If it is damaged, contact  
your dealer to newly get correct one.  
• Only plug the power cord into an outlet rated for use with the power cord's  
specified voltage range.The power outlet should be close to the projector and  
easily accessible. Remove the power cord for complete separation.  
• Never modify the power cord.  
ꢀ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control  
Remote control  
Laser pointer  
This remote control has a laser pointer in place of a finger or rod. The laser beam works  
and the LASER INDICATOR lights while the LASER button is pressed.  
LASER INDICATOR  
LASER button  
WARNING The laser pointer of the remote control is used in place of a  
finger or rod. Never look directly into the laser beam outlet or point the laser  
beam at other people. The laser beam can cause vision problems.  
CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures  
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
Putting batteries  
Please load the batteries before using the remote control. If the remote control starts to  
malfunction, replace the batteries. If you will not use the remote control for an extended  
period, remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place.  
Slide back and remove the  
ꢀ.  
battery cover in the direction  
of the arrow.  
Align and insert the two AA  
ꢁ.  
batteries according to their  
plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control.  
3. Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place.  
WARNING Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as  
directed. Improper use may result in battery explosion, cracking or leakage,  
which could result in fire, injury and/or pollution of the surrounding environment.  
• Be sure to use only the batteries specified. Do not use batteries of different  
types at the same time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.  
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.  
• Keep a battery away from children and pets.  
• Do not recharge, short circuit, solder or disassemble a battery.  
Do not allow a battery in a fire or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.  
If you observe a leakage of a battery, wipe out the flower and then replace a battery.  
If the flower adheres your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.  
• Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.  
ꢀ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control  
About the remote control signal  
The remote control works with the projector’s remote sensors. This projector has three  
remote sensors on the front, on the top, and on the back.  
The sensors can be respectively turned active or inactive using the “REMOTE RECEIV”  
in the SERVICE item of OPTION menu ( 47). Each sensor senses the signal within the  
following range when the sensor is active.  
The front and top sensors:  
60 degrees (30 degrees to the left and right of the  
sensor) within 3 meters about.  
The back sensor:  
40 degrees (ꢁ0 degrees to the left and right of the  
sensor) within 3 meters about.  
30º  
30º  
Approx.  
3 m  
NOTE The remote control signal reflected  
in the screen or the like may be available. If it is  
difficult to send the signal to the sensor directly,  
attempt to make the signal reflect.  
30º  
ꢁ0º  
• The remote control uses infrared light to send  
signals to the projector (Class ꢀ LED), so be sure  
to use the remote control in an area free from  
obstacles that could block the remote control’s  
signal to the projector.  
• The remote control may not work correctly if  
strong light (such as direct sun light) or light from  
an extremely close range (such as from an inverter  
fluorescent lamp) shines on the remote sensor  
of the projector. Adjust the position of projector  
avoiding those lights.  
30º  
Approx.  
3 m  
ꢁ0º  
Approx.  
3 m  
Changing the frequency of remote control signal  
The accessory remote control has the choice of the  
Back of the  
mode ꢀ or the mode ꢁ, in the frequency of its signal.  
remote control  
If the remote control does not function properly,  
attempt to change the signal frequency.  
Please remember that the “REMOTE FREQ.” in  
Inside of  
the battery cover  
SERVICE item of OPTION menu ( 47) of the  
projector to be controlled should be set to the same  
mode as the remote control.  
To set the mode of the remote control, slide the  
knob of the frequency switch inside the battery  
cover into the position indicated by the mode  
number to choose.  
2
1
Frequency switch  
ꢀ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote control  
Using as a wired remote control  
The accessory remote control works as a wired remote  
control, when the wired control port at the bottom of the  
remote control connects with the REMOTE CONTROL  
port on the back of the projector via an audio cable with 3.5  
diameter stereo mini plugs.  
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
(3.5Φ)  
AUDIO  
OUT  
L
O
IN  
4
When the remote control signal is hard to reach surely to  
the projector in the environment, this function is effective.  
NOTE To connect the remote control with the projector, use an audio cable with  
3.5 mm stereo mini plugs.  
Using as a simple PC mouse & keyboard  
The accessory remote control works as a simple mouse  
and keyboard of the PC, when an Mꢀ-D/USB cable  
connects this projector’s Mꢀ-D port with the PC’s DVI-D  
and USB (A type) ports.  
(1) Mouse left button  
to a signal  
source  
Pushing the button into the center point works instead  
of clicking the mouse's left button.  
M1-D  
Tilting this button to one of eight directions moves the  
PC's move pointer on the screen in the direction.  
(2) Mouse right button  
Pressing the button works instead of clicking the  
mouse’s right button.  
LASER  
INDICATOR  
(3) Lever switch  
STANDBY/ON  
VIDEO  
RGB  
BLANK  
LASER  
Sliding toward the side marked ▲ works instead of the  
[↑] key on the keyboard. Sliding toward the side marked  
▼ works instead of the [↓] key on the keyboard.  
(4) Cursor button ◄  
This button works instead of the [←] key on the  
keyboard.  
(5) Cursor button ►  
(1)  
BLANK  
LASER  
(2)  
ASPECT  
PUSH ENTER  
ASPECT  
(3)  
(4)  
(6)  
PAGE UP  
ESC  
PAGE DOWN  
RESET  
PUSH  
ENTER  
MENU  
AUTO  
(5)  
(7)  
POSITION  
PAGE UP  
ESC  
PAGE DOWN  
RESET  
MAGNIFY  
ON  
MY BUTTON  
1
VOLUME  
MUTE  
OFF  
2
MENU  
FREEZE  
KEYSTONE  
SEARCH  
This button works instead of the [→] key on the keyboard.  
(6) PAGE UP button  
This button works instead of the PAGE UP key on the key board.  
(7) PAGE DOWN button  
This button works instead of the PAGE DOWN key on the key board.  
NOTE When the simple mouse & keyboard function of this product does not work  
correctly, please check the following.  
- When an Mꢀ-D/USB cable connects this projector with a PC having a built-in pointing  
device (e.g. track ball) like a notebook PC, open BIOS setup menu, then select the  
external mouse and disable the built-in pointing device, because the built-in pointing  
device may have priority to this function.  
- Windows 95 OSR ꢁ.ꢀ or higher is required for this function. And also this function may  
not work depending on the PC’s configurations and mouse drivers.  
-
Operating simultaneously two or more keys is void except for mouse drag and drop operation.  
- This function is activated only when the projector is working properly.  
ꢀ6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power on/off  
Power on/off  
STANDBY/ON button  
POWER indicator  
Turning on the power  
Make sure that the power cord is firmly and correctly  
ꢀ. connected to the projector and the outlet.  
Remove the lens cover, and set the power switch to the  
ꢁ. ON position (marked “ I “).  
The power indicator will light up in steady orange ( 66).  
Then wait several seconds because the buttons may not  
function for these several seconds.  
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the  
Power  
switch  
3. remote control.  
The projection lamp will light up and the POWER indicator  
will begin blinking in green. When the power is completely  
on, the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green.  
To display the picture, select an input signal according to the section "Selecting an input  
signal" ( 19).  
Turning off the power  
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control.  
ꢀ. The message "Power off?" will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds.  
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the projector or the remote control again while the message  
ꢁ. appears.  
The projector lamp will go off, and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in orange.  
Then the POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp  
cooling is complete.  
Make sure that the power indicator lights in steady orange, and set the power switch to the  
3. OFF position (marked “O“).  
The POWER indicator will go off. Attach the lens cover.  
Do not turn the projector on for ꢀ0 minutes or more after turning it off. Turning the projector on again  
too soon could shorten the lifetime of some consumable parts of the projector.  
WARNING A strong light is emitted when the projector’s power is on. Do not look into  
the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through any of the projector’s openings.  
Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just after use, since it is too hot.  
NOTE Turn the power on/off in right order. Please power on the projector prior  
to the connected devices. Power off the projector later than the connected devices.  
Before turning the projector off, be sure to perform the REMOVE procedure using the  
(
58)  
SERVICE menu under the MIU menu if the SD card or USB memory is used  
.
• When the AUTO ON of the OPTION menu is set to the TURN ON, and the power  
was turned off by the power switch last time, only turning the power switch on makes  
(
43)  
.
the projection lamp light and makes the POWER indicator begin blinking  
(
66)  
only when the projector is not turned off by  
• Use the shutdown switch  
normal procedure.  
ꢀ7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Operating  
PUSH  
ENTER  
Adjusting the volume  
PAGE UP  
ESC  
PAGE DOWN  
RESET  
Press the VOLUME button on the remote control.  
ꢀ.  
MENU  
AUTO  
A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in adjusting the volume.  
POSITION  
ꢁ. Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to adjust the volume.  
MAGNIFY  
ON  
MY BUTTON  
1
VOLUME  
MU
To close the dialog and complete the operation, press the  
VOLUME button again. Even if you do not do anything, the  
dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.  
● When no audio port is selected for current picture input port, the volume  
(
38)  
adjustment is disable. Please see the AUDIO item of AUDIO menu.  
Temporarily muting the sound  
POSITION  
AUTO  
Press the MUTE button on the remote control.  
MAGNIFY  
ON  
MY BUTTON  
1
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ꢀ.  
A dialog will appear on the screen indicating that you have muted the sound.  
OFF  
2
To restore the sound, press the MUTE or VOLUME button.  
Even if you do not do anything, the dialog will automatically  
disappear after a few seconds.  
FREEZE  
KEYSTONE  
SEA
● As long as no audio input is selected for current picture input port, the sound is  
(
38)  
always muted. Please see the AUDIO item of AUDIO menu.  
Selecting an input signal  
Press the INPUT button on the projector.  
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its  
input port as below.  
ꢀ.  
RGB ꢀ  
VIDEO  
RGB ꢁ  
Mꢀ-D  
MIU  
B
B
R
R
S-VIDEO  
COMPONENT (Y, C /R , C /B )  
Press the RGB button on the remote control to select an  
input port for the RGB signal.  
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its RGB  
input port as below.  
ꢀ.  
LASER  
INDICATOR  
STANDBY/ON  
VIDEO  
RGB  
RGB ꢀ RGB ꢁ Mꢀ-D MIU  
   
● If the RGB button is pushed (when switching from VIDEO to RGB signals)  
when TURN ON is selected for the AUTO SEARCH item in the OPTION menu  
the projector will check the RGB 1 port first. If no input is detected at the port,  
the projector will check other port in above order.  
(continued on next page)  
ꢀ8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Selecting an input signal (continued)  
LASER  
INDICATOR  
Press the VIDEO button on the remote control to select an  
input for video signal.  
Each time you press the button, the projector switches its  
video input port as below.  
STANDBY/ON  
VIDEO  
RGB  
ꢀ.  
B
B
R
R
COMPONENT (Y, C /R , C /B )  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
● If the VIDEO button is pushed (when switching from RGB to VIDEO signals)  
when TURN ON is selected for the AUTO SEARCH item in the OPTION menu  
B
B
R
R
the projector will check the COMPONENT (Y, C /R , C /B ) port first. If no input  
is detected at the port, the projector will check other ports in above order.  
MAGNIFY  
ON  
MY BUTTON  
1
VOLUME  
MUTE  
Searching an input signal  
OFF  
2
ꢀ. Press the SEARCH button on the remote control.  
FREEZE  
KEYSTONE  
SEARCH  
The projector will start to check its input ports in order to  
find any input signals.  
When an input is found, the projector will stop searching and display the image.  
If no signal is found, the projector will return to the state selected before the  
operation.  
B
B
R
R
RGB ꢀ  
RGB ꢁ  
Mꢀ-D  
MIU  
COMPONENT (Y, C /R , C /B )  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
    
● The MIU input is skipped, as long as no image is sent from PC on the “Live  
(
54)  
.
Mode” of MIU  
Selecting an aspect ratio  
Press the ASPECT button on the remote control.  
Each time you press the button, the projector switches the mode for aspect  
ratio in turn.  
ꢀ.  
For an RGB or MIU signal  
NORMAL 4:3 SMALL  
ꢀ6:9  
    
For an M1-D signal  
NORMAL 4:3 ꢀ6:9  
ASPCT  
ꢀ4:9  
     
SMALL  
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal  
4:3 ꢀ6:9 ꢀ4:9 SMALL  
    
For no signal  
4:3 (fixed)  
● The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal.  
● Performing the automatic adjustment initializes the aspect ratio setting.  
ꢀ9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Focus ring  
Adjusting the zoom and focus  
ꢀ. Use the zoom ring to adjust the screen size.  
ꢁ. Use the focus ring to focus the picture.  
Zoom ring  
Top  
Adjusting the lens shift  
2/5  
UP  
Use the vertical lens shift dial to shift  
ꢀ.  
Lens shift cover  
the picture upward or downward.  
DOWN  
Use the horizontal lens shift dial to  
shift the picture left or right.  
1/10  
ꢁ.  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
1/10  
NOTE • When the vertical lens  
shift is adjusted, it is recommended to  
shift the picture upward.  
Using the automatic adjustment feature  
PUSH  
ENTER  
ꢀ. Press the AUTO button on the remote control.  
PAGE UP  
ESC  
PAGE DOWN  
MENU  
AUTO  
RESET  
For an RGB or MIU signal  
POSITION  
MAGNIFY  
The vertical position, the horizontal position, the horizontal  
phase and the horizontal size will be automatically adjusted.  
MY B
VOLUME  
And the aspect ratio will be automatically set to default. Make sure that the  
application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this  
feature. A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture  
when adjusting.  
For an M1-D signal  
The aspect ratio will be automatically set to default.  
For a video signal or s-video signal  
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected  
automatically.  
This function is available only when the AUTO is selected to the VIDEO  
(
33)  
FORMAT item in INPUT menu  
. For a component video signal, the  
signal type is identified automatically independently of this function.  
For a video signal, s-video signal or component video signal  
The vertical position, horizontal position and aspect ratio will be automatically  
set to default.  
For a component video signal  
The horizontal phase will be automatically set to default.  
● The automatic adjustment operation requires about 10 seconds. Also please  
note that it may not function correctly with some input.  
ꢁ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
PUSH  
ENTER  
Adjusting the position  
PAGE UP  
ESC  
PAGE DOWN  
RESET  
Press the POSITION button on the remote control.  
ꢀ.  
The “POSITION” indication will appear on the screen.  
MENU  
AUTO  
POSITION  
MAY  
Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼/◄/► to adjust the picture  
position.  
ꢁ.  
MY BUTTON  
VOLUME  
When you want to reset the operation, press the RESET button on the remote  
control during the operation.  
To complete this operation, press the POSITION button again. Even if you do  
not do anything, the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.  
When this function is performed on a video signal, s-video signal or component video  
signal, some image such as an extra-line may appear at outside of the picture.  
When this function is performed on a video signal, s-video signal, or component video signal  
of 5ꢁ5i (480i) or 6ꢁ5i (576i), the range of this adjustment depends on the OVER SCAN in  
(
30)  
setting. It is not possible to adjust when the OVER SCAN is set to ꢀ0.  
IMAGE menu  
Correcting the keystone distortions  
Press the KEYSTONE button on the  
MAGNIFY  
ON  
MY BUTTON  
1
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ꢀ.  
ꢀ-';5610'ꢀ  
ꢀ#761ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ':'%76'ꢀ  
ꢀ/#07#.ꢀ  
remote control. A dialog will appear on the  
screen to aid you in correcting the distortion.  
OFF  
2
ꢁꢂ  
ꢁꢂ  
FREEZE  
KEYSTONE  
SEARCH  
Use the cursor buttons  
MANUAL operation, and press the button to perform the following.  
/
to select AUTO or  
ꢁ.  
ꢀ) AUTO executes automatic vertical keystone correction.  
ꢁ) Manual displays a dialog for keystone correction.  
Use the cursor buttons ◄/► to select the direction to correct  
(
or ) then use the buttons ▲/▼ for adjustment.  
To close the dialog and complete this operation, press the  
KEYSTONE button again. Even if you don’t do anything,  
the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds.  
ꢀꢁ ꢀꢁ  
-';5610'ꢂ  
● The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For some input,  
this function may not work well.  
● When V:INVERT or H&V:INVERT is selected to the MIRROR item in the  
SETUP menu, if the projector screen is inclined or angled downward, this  
function may not work correctly.  
● When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus), this function  
may be excessive. This function should be used when the zoom adjustment is  
set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus) whenever possible.  
When the projector is placed on the level (about ±3°), this function may not work.  
When the projector is inclined to near ±30 degree or over, this function may not  
work well.  
When the vertical lens shift is not set fully upward (not set fully downward for the  
46)  
(
optional lens type FL-60ꢀ only  
), this function may not work well.  
When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center, this function may not work well.  
(
52).  
This function will be unavailable when Transition Detector is on  
ꢁꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Using the magnify feature  
ESC  
MENU  
AUTO  
RESET  
Press the ON button of MAGNIFY on the remote control.  
ꢀ.  
The “MAGNIFY” indication will appear on the screen  
POSITION  
(although the indication will disappear in several seconds with  
no operation), and the projector will go into the MAGNIFY  
mode.  
MAGNIFY  
O
MY BUTTON  
1
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ꢁ. Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to adjust the zoom level.  
To move the zoom area, press the POSITION button in the MAGNIFY mode,  
then use the cursor buttons ▲/▼/◄/► to move the area. And to finalize the  
zoom area, press the POSITION button again.  
To exit from the MAGNIFY mode and restore the screen to normal, press the  
OFF button of MAGNIFY on the remote control.  
● The projector automatically exits from the MAGNIFY mode when the input  
signal is changed, or when the display condition is changed.  
● Although in the MAGNIFY mode, the keystone distortion condition may vary, it  
will be restored when the projector exits from the MAGNIFY mode.  
NOTE The zoom level can be finely adjusted. Closely watch the screen to  
find the level you want.  
Freezing the screen  
Press the FREEZE button on the remote control.  
The “FREEZE” indication will appear on the screen (although  
the indication will not appear when the TURN ON is selected  
MAGNIFY  
ON  
MY BUTTON  
1
VOLUME  
MUTE  
ꢀ.  
OFF  
2
FREEZE  
KEYSTONE  
SEARCH  
(
42)  
to the MESSAGE item of SCREEN menu  
projector will go into the FREEZE mode.  
), and the  
To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal, press the FREEZE  
button again.  
● The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when the input signal  
changes, or when one of the projector’s buttons or the remote control buttons  
of STANDBY/ON, SEARCH, RGB, VIDEO, BLANK, AUTO, ASPECT, VOLUME,  
MUTE, KEYSTONE, POSITION, MENU, MAGNIFY and MY BUTTON is  
pressed.  
● If the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time, the LCD panel  
might possibly be burned in. Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE mode  
for too long.  
ꢁꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Temporarily blanking the screen  
Press the BLANK button on the remote control.  
ꢀ.  
The blank screen will be displayed instead of the screen  
of input signal. Please refer to the BLANK item in SCREEN  
BLANK  
LASER  
(
39).  
menu  
To exit from the blank screen and return to the input signal screen, press the  
BLANK button again.  
● The projector automatically returns to the input signal screen when one of  
the projector’s buttons or the remote control buttons is pressed or one of the  
commands (except get commands) is transmitted to the control port.  
NOTE • The sound is not connected with the blank screen function. If  
necessary, set the volume or mute first.  
ꢁ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating  
Using the menu function  
This projector has the following menus: PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT, SETUP, AUDIO,  
SCREEN, OPTION, MIU, and EASY MENU. EASY MENU consists of functions often used,  
and the other menus are classified into each purpose. Each of these menus is operated  
using the same methods. The basic operations of these menus are as follows.  
ENTER button  
ASPECT  
PUSH  
ENTER  
PAGE UP  
ESC  
PAGE DOWN  
RESET  
Cursor buttons  
MENU button  
RESET button  
MENU  
AUTO  
POSITION  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢀ2+%674'ꢀ  
ꢄ5'.'%6ꢀ  
Press the MENU button on the remote control or one of  
the cursor buttons on the projector.  
The Advanced MENU, or EASY MENU that has priority just  
after powered on, will appear.  
ꢀ.  
ꢀ$4+)*60'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ  
ꢀ%1064#56ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ  
ꢀ)#//#ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ&'(#7.6ꢀꢁꢀ  
%1.14ꢀ6'/2ꢀꢀꢀ/+&  
%1.14ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ  
ꢀ+0276ꢀ  
+/#)'ꢀ  
5'672ꢀ  
ꢀ#7&+1  
ꢀ5%4''0  
ꢀ126+10  
ꢀ/+7  
ꢀ6+06ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ  
ꢀ5*#420'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢀ  
ꢀ#%6+8'ꢀ+4+5ꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07 ꢀ/;ꢀ/'/14;ꢀꢀꢀꢀ5#8'ꢀꢁ  
In the EASY MENU  
If you want to change it to the Advanced MENU, select the  
"Go to Advanced Menu..."  
ꢁ.  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢀ#52'%6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢃꢄꢀ  
3. Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to select an item to operate.  
':'%76'  
#761ꢀ-';5610'  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢅꢆ  
-';5610'  
-';5610'  
2+%674'ꢀ/1&'  
$4+)*60'55  
%1064#56  
%1.14  
4. Use the cursor buttons◄/► to operate the item.  
014/#.  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢀꢄ  
In the Advanced MENU  
6+06  
Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to select a menu.  
ꢁ.  
5*#420'55  
9*+52'4  
/+4414  
4'5'6  
(+.6'4ꢀ6+/'  
.#0)7#)'  
014/#.  
014/#.  
If you want to change it to the EASY MENU, select the  
EASY MENU.  
ꢀꢀꢀꢆJ  
'0).+5*  
ꢀ)QꢀVQꢀ#FXCPEGFꢀ/GPWꢇꢇꢇ  
Then press the cursor button ► on the projector or remote  
control, or the ENTER button on the remote control to select  
an item. The display of the selected menu will be active.  
Use the cursor buttons ▲/▼ to select an item to operate.  
3.  
Then press the cursor button  
on the projector or remote control, or the ENTER button  
on the remote control to progress. The operation menu of the selected item will appear.  
4. Use the cursor buttons▲/▼ to operate the item.  
When you want to reset the operation, press the RESET button on the remote control  
during the operation. Note that items whose functions are performed simultaneously  
with operation (ex. LANGUAGE, H PHASE, VOLUME etc.) cannot be reset.  
In the Advanced MENU, when you want to return to the previous display, press the  
cursor button  
control.  
on the projector or remote control, or the ESC button on the remote  
Press the MENU button on the remote control again to close the menu  
and complete this operation. Even if you do not do anything, the dialog will  
5.  
automatically disappear after about ꢀ0 seconds.  
● Some functions cannot be performed when a certain input port is selected, or  
when a certain input signal is displayed.  
ꢁ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EASY Menu  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢀ#52'%6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢃꢄꢀ  
EASY Menu  
':'%76'  
#761ꢀ-';5610'  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢅꢆ  
-';5610'  
From the EASY MENU, items shown in the table below can  
be performed.  
-';5610'  
2+%674'ꢀ/1&'  
$4+)*60'55  
%1064#56  
%1.14  
014/#.  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢀꢄ  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the  
projector or remote control. Then perform it according to the  
following table.  
6+06  
5*#420'55  
9*+52'4  
/+4414  
014/#.  
014/#.  
4'5'6  
(+.6'4ꢀ6+/'  
.#0)7#)'  
ꢀꢀꢀꢆJ  
'0).+5*  
ꢀ)QꢀVQꢀ#FXCPEGFꢀ/GPWꢇꢇꢇ  
Item  
Description  
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.  
ASPECT  
See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu ( 30).  
AUTO  
KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE  
Using the ► button executes the auto keystone function.  
See the AUTO KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE item in SETUP menu  
(
36).  
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.  
See the KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu ( 36).  
KEYSTONE  
KEYSTONE  
Using the ◄/► buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion.  
See the KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu ( 37).  
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the picture mode.  
The picture modes are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR  
TEMP settings. Choose a suitable mode according to the projected  
source.  
NORMAL  
CINEMA  
DYNAMIC  
ó
ó
WHITEBOARD  
BOARD(GREEN)  
BOARD(BLACK)  
ó
ó
COLOR TEMP  
MID DEFAULT  
LOW DEFAULT  
HIGH DEFAULT  
Hi-BRIGHT-ꢀ DEFAULT  
Hi-BRIGHT-ꢁ DEFAULT  
MID DEFAULT  
GAMMA  
NORMAL  
CINEMA  
DYNAMIC  
BOARD(BLACK)  
BOARD(GREEN)  
WHITEBOARD  
#ꢀ DEFAULT  
#ꢁ DEFAULT  
#3 DEFAULT  
#4 DEFAULT  
#4 DEFAULT  
#5 DEFAULT  
PICTURE MODE  
• When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs  
from pre-assigned modes above, the display on the menu for the  
PICTURE MODE is “CUSTOM”. Please refer to the GAMMA ( 27)  
and COLOR TEMP ( 28) items in PICTURE menu.  
When this function is performed, a certain extra such as a line may appear.  
(continued on next page)  
ꢁ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EASY Menu  
EASY Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the brightness.  
See the BRIGHTNESS item in PICTURE menu ( 27).  
BRIGHTNESS  
CONTRAST  
COLOR  
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the contrast.  
See the CONTRAST item in PICTURE menu  
(
27).  
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the strength of whole color.  
See the COLOR item in PICTURE menu ( 28).  
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the tint.  
TINT  
See the TINT item in PICTURE menu ( 28).  
Using the ◄/► buttons adjusts the sharpness.  
See the SHARPNESS item in PICTURE menu  
SHARPNESS  
WHISPER  
MIRROR  
(
28).  
Using the ◄/► buttons turns off/on the whisper mode.  
See the WHISPER item in SETUP menu ( 37).  
Using the ◄/► buttons switches the mode for mirror status.  
See the MIRROR item in SETUP menu ( 37).  
Performing this item resets all of the EASY MENU items except the  
FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE.  
A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting the RESET using  
the ▲ button performs resetting.  
RESET  
Performing this item resets the filter time which counts usage time  
of the air filter.  
A dialog is displayed for confirmation. Selecting the RESET using  
the ▲ button performs resetting.  
FILTER TIME  
LANGUAGE  
See the FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu ( 44).  
Using the ◄/► buttons changes the display language.  
See the LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu  
(
39).  
Select “Go to Advanced Menu…” on the menu, and press the  
or ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE, IMAGE, INPUT,  
SETUP, AUDIO, SCREEN, OPTION or NETWORK.  
Go to  
Advanced Menu...  
ꢁ6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PICTURE Menu  
PICTURE Menu  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢀ2+%674'ꢀ  
+/#)'ꢀ  
ꢀ+0276ꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢄ5'.'%6ꢀ  
From the PICTURE menu, items shown in the table below  
can be performed.  
ꢀ$4+)*60'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ  
ꢀ%1064#56ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ  
ꢀ)#//#ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ&'(#7.6ꢀꢁꢀ  
%1.14ꢀ6'/2ꢀꢀꢀ/+&  
%1.14ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the  
projector or remote control, and press the cursor button  
on the projector or remote control, or the ENTER button  
on the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it  
according to the following table.  
5'672ꢀ  
ꢀ#7&+1  
ꢀ5%4''0  
ꢀ126+10  
ꢀ/+7  
ꢀ6+06ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ㧗ꢃ  
ꢀ5*#420'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢀ  
ꢀ#%6+8'ꢀ+4+5ꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07 ꢀ/;ꢀ/'/14;ꢀꢀꢀꢀ5#8'ꢀꢁ  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the brightness.  
BRIGHTNESS  
Light  
Dark  
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the contrast.  
Strong Weak  
CONTRAST  
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the gamma mode.  
#ꢀ DEFAULT #ꢀ CUSTOM  
#ꢁ DEFAULT  
#ꢁ CUSTOM  
#3 DEFAULT  
ó
ó
ó
ó
ó
3
#5 CUSTOM  
#5 DEFAULT  
#4 CUSTOM  
#4 DEFAULT  
#3 CUSTOM  
ó
ó
ó
To adjust CUSTOM  
ENTER :  
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
Selecting a mode whose name includes  
CUSTOM and then pressing the ► button  
or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid  
you in adjusting the mode.  
This function is useful when you want to  
change the brightness of particular tones.  
+0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0  
[
]
GAMMA CUSTOM 1  
Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons, and  
adjust the level using the ▲/▼ buttons.  
GAMMA  
You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your  
adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.  
Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as  
below.  
No pattern Gray scale of 9 steps  
ð
Ramp Gray scale of ꢀ5 steps  
The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test  
pattern except the darkest in the left end. If you want to adjust the  
ꢁnd tone from left end on the test pattern (Gray scale of 9 steps),  
use the equalizing adjustment bar “ꢀ”. The darkest tone at the left  
end of the test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing  
adjustment bar.  
• When this function is performed, lines or other distortion may  
appear.  
(continued on next page)  
ꢁ7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PICTURE Menu  
PICTURE Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the color temperature mode.  
HIGH DEFAULT HIGH CUSTOM MID DEFAULT MID CUSTOM  
LOW DEFAULT  
LOW CUSTOM  
Hi-BRIGHT-1 DEFAULT  
Hi-BRIGHT-1 CUSTOM  
Hi-BRIGHT-2 DEFAULT Hi-BRIGHT-2 CUSTOM  
To adjust CUSTOM  
Selecting a mode whose name includes  
ENTER  
:
CUSTOM and then pressing the ► button or the  
ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in  
adjusting the OFFSET and GAIN of the selected  
mode.  
OFFSET  
GAIN  
R
G
B
R
G
B
+0 +0 +0  
+0 +0 +0  
OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity  
on the whole tones of the test pattern.  
COLOR TEMP [CUSTOM-1]  
COLOR TEMP  
GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity  
on the brighter tones of the test pattern.  
Choose an item using the ◄/► buttons, and adjust the level using  
the ▲/▼ buttons.  
You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your  
adjustment by pressing the ENTER button.  
Each time you press the ENTER button, the pattern changes as  
below.  
No pattern Gray scale of 9 steps  
ð
Ramp Gray scale of ꢀ5 steps  
• When this function is performed, lines or other distortion may  
appear.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the strength of whole color.  
Strong  
Weak  
ó
COLOR  
TINT  
• This item can be selected only for a video signal, s-video or  
component video signal.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the tint.  
Greenish  
Reddish  
ó
• This item can be selected only for a video signal, s-video or  
component video signal.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the sharpness.  
Strong  
Weak  
ó
SHARPNESS  
There may be some noise and/or the screen may flicker for a  
moment when an adjustment is made. This is not a malfunction.  
(continued on next page)  
ꢁ8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PICTURE Menu  
PICTURE Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons changes the active iris control mode.  
PRESENTATION  
THEATER  
TURN OFF  
ó
ó
Feature  
The active iris displays the best presentation  
image for both bright and dark scenes.  
PRESENTATION  
ACTIVE IRIS  
The active iris displays the best theater image for  
both bright and dark scenes.  
THEATER  
TURN OFF  
The active iris is always open.  
The screen may flicker when the PRESENTATION or THEATER  
modes are selected. If this occurs select TURN OFF.  
This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data (for all the items  
of the PICTURE menu).  
Selecting a function using the ▲/▼ buttons and pressing the ► or  
ENTER button performs each function.  
LOADꢀ  
LOADꢁ  
LOAD3  
LOAD4  
ó
ó
ó
SAVE4 SAVE3  
SAVEꢁ  
SAVEꢀ  
ó
ó
ó
LOAD1, LOAD2, LOAD3, LOAD4  
Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked  
in the number included in the function’s name, and adjusts the  
picture automatically depending on the data.  
• The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are  
skipped.  
• Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by  
loading data. If you want to keep the current adjustment, please  
save it before performing a LOAD function.  
MY MEMORY  
• There may be some noise and the screen may flicker for a  
moment when loading data. This is not malfunction.  
• The LOAD functions can be also performed by the MY MEMORY  
button which can be set by the MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu  
(
45).  
SAVE1, SAVE2, SAVE3, SAVE4  
Performing a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into  
the memory linked in the number included in the function’s name.  
• Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be  
lost by saving a new data into the memory.  
ꢁ9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMAGE Menu  
IMAGE Menu  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢀ2+%674'ꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6ꢀ  
From the IMAGE menu, items shown in the table below  
can be performed.  
ꢀ#52'%6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢂꢄꢀ  
ꢀ18'4ꢀ5%#0ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢀ  
ꢀ8ꢀ215+6+10ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢇꢅꢀ  
+/#)'ꢀ  
ꢀ+0276ꢀ  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the  
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button  
on the projector or remote control, or ENTER button on  
the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it  
according to the following table.  
*ꢀ215+6+10ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢃꢇꢀ  
ꢀꢀ  
5'672ꢀ  
ꢀ#7&+1  
*ꢀ2*#5'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ ꢁꢆꢀ  
ꢀ*ꢀ5+<'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢄꢃꢃꢀ  
ꢀ5%4''0  
ꢀ126+10  
ꢀ/+7  
#761ꢀ#&,756ꢀ':'%76'ꢀ  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio.  
For an RGB or MIU signal  
NORMAL  
4:3 SMALL  
ꢀ6:9  
ó ó ó  
For an M1-D signal  
NORMAL 4:3  
ꢀ6:9 SMALL  
ꢀ4:9  
ó ó ó ó  
ASPECT  
For a Video signal, S-video signal or Component video signal  
4:3 ꢀ6:9 ꢀ4:9 SMALL  
ó ó ó  
For no signal  
4:3 (fixed)  
• The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the over-scan ratio.  
Large (It reduces picture)  
This item can be selected only for a video, s-video and component signal.  
• When this adjustment is too large, certain degradation may appear  
at the frame area of the picture. In such a case, please adjust small.  
Small (It magnifies picture)  
ó
OVER SCAN  
V POSITION  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the vertical position.  
Up  
Down  
ó
Over-adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on the screen. If this  
occurs please reset the vertical position to the default setting. Pressing the RESET button  
when the V POSITION is selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting.  
When this function is performed on a video signal, s-video signal, or  
component video signal of 5ꢁ5i (480i) or 6ꢁ5i (576i), the range of this  
adjustment depends on the OVER SCAN  
possible to adjust when the OVER SCAN is set to ꢀ0.  
(
above) setting. It is not  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the horizontal position.  
Left  
Right  
ó
Over-adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on the screen. If this  
occurs please reset the horizontal position to the default setting. Pressing the RESET  
button when the H POSITION is selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting.  
H POSITION  
When this function is performed on a video signal, s-video signal, or  
component video signal of 5ꢁ5i (480i) or 6ꢁ5i (576i), the range of this  
adjustment depends on the OVER SCAN above) setting. It is not  
(
possible to adjust when the OVER SCAN is set to ꢀ0.  
(continued on next page)  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMAGE Menu  
IMAGE Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate flicker.  
Right Left  
ó
H PHASE  
• This item can be selected only for an RGB signal, an MIU signal or  
a component video signal. (except 5ꢁ5i (480i), 6ꢁ5i (576i), SCART  
RGB)  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the horizontal size.  
Large  
Small  
ó
• This item can be selected only for an RGB signal.  
H SIZE  
• When this adjustment is excessive, the picture may not be  
displayed correctly. In such a case, please reset the adjustment  
by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this  
operation.  
Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature.  
For an RGB or MIU signal  
The vertical position, the horizontal position, the horizontal phase  
and the horizontal size will be automatically set to default. And the  
aspect ratio will be automatically selected.  
Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size  
prior to attempting to use this feature. A dark picture may still be  
incorrectly adjusted. Use a bright picture when adjusting.  
For an M1-D signal  
The aspect ratio will be automatically set to default.  
For a Video signal or S-video signal  
The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be  
selected automatically.  
AUTO ADJUST  
EXECUTE  
This function is available only when the AUTO mode is selected to  
the VIDEO FORMAT item in INPUT menu ( 33). For a component  
video signal, the signal type is identified automatically independently  
of this function.  
For a Video signal, S-video signal or Component video signal  
The vertical position, horizontal position and aspect ratio will be  
automatically set to default.  
For a Component video signal  
The horizontal phase will be automatically set to default.  
• The automatic adjustment operation requires about ꢀ0 seconds.  
Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input.  
3ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INPUT Menu  
INPUT Menu  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6ꢀ  
From the INPUT menu, items shown in the table below can  
be performed.  
ꢀ241)4'55+8'ꢀꢀ68  
ꢀ2+%674'  
ꢀ+/#)'  
ꢀ+0276  
ꢀ8+&'1ꢀ04ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ/+&  
ꢀꢃ&ꢄ;%5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ56+..  
ꢀ%1.14ꢀ52#%'ꢀꢀ#761  
ꢀ%1/210'06ꢀꢀꢀꢀ%1/210'06  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the  
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button  
on the projector or remote control, or ENTER button on  
the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it  
according to the following table.  
ꢀ5'672  
ꢀ#7&+1  
ꢀ8+&'1ꢀ(14/#6ꢀ#761  
ꢀ5%4''0  
ꢀ126+10  
ꢀ/+7  
ꢀ/ꢁꢄ&ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ014/#.  
ꢀ(4#/'ꢀ.1%-ꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ10  
ꢀ4)$ꢀ+0  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07  
ꢀ4'51.76+10  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the progress mode.  
TV FILM TURN OFF  
ó ó  
• This function is performed only for an interlaced signal of a VIDEO  
input, an S-VIDEO input or COMPONENT VIDEO input of 5ꢁ5i  
(480i), 6ꢁ5i (576i) or ꢀꢀꢁ5i (ꢀ080i) signal.  
PROGRESSIVE  
• When TV or FILM is selected, the screen image will be sharp.  
FILM adapts to the ꢁ-3 Pull-Down conversion system. But these  
may cause a certain defect (for example, jagged line) of the picture  
for a quick moving object. In such a case, please select TURN OFF,  
even though the screen image may lose the sharpness.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the noise reduction mode.  
HIGH  
MID LOW  
ó ó  
• This function performs only at a VIDEO input, an S-VIDEO or  
COMPONENT VIDEO input of 5ꢁ5i(480i), 6ꢁ5i(576i) or ꢀꢀꢁ5i (ꢀ080i)  
signal.  
VIDEO NR  
• When this function is excessive, it may cause a certain  
degradation of the picture.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the 3D-YCS mode.  
STILL  
MOVIE  
TURN OFF  
ó
ó
• This function performs only at a VIDEO input of NTSC, and PAL.  
3D-YCS  
• MOVIE is the mode for images with a lot of motions like movies,  
and STILL is the mode for images with few motions or completely  
still ones like slides.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for color space.  
AUTO  
RGB  
ó ó  
SMPTEꢁ40  
REC709  
REC60ꢀ  
ó
ó
• This item can be selected only for an RGB signal or a component  
video signal (except 5ꢁ5i (480i), 6ꢁ5i (576i) and SCART RGB).  
COLOR SPACE  
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.  
• The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals. In such a  
case, it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO.  
(continued on next page)  
3ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INPUT Menu  
INPUT Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the function of the COMPONENT  
(Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr) port.  
COMPONENT  
SCART RGB  
ó
When the SCART RGB is selected, the COMPONENT (Y, Cb/Pb,  
Cr/Pr) and VIDEO ports will function as a SCART RGB port. A  
SCART adapter or SCART cable is required for a SCART RGB  
input to the projector. For details, contact your dealer.  
Y
CB/PB  
VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
COMPONENT  
CR/PR  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO IN  
3
AUDIO IN  
4
Video G B R  
SCART OUT  
Set the video format for the s-video port and video port.  
(ꢀ) Use the ◄/► buttons to select the input port.  
8+&'1ꢀ(14/#6  
5ꢁ8+&'1 8+&'1  
(2) Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode  
for video format.  
#761  
065%  
2#.  
AUTO  
NTSC  
PAL SECAM  
ó ó  
ó
5'%#/  
065%ꢂꢃꢂꢄ  
/ꢁ2#.  
0ꢁ2#.  
N-PAL  
M-PAL NTSC4.43  
ó
ó
VIDEO FORMAT  
• This item is performed only for a video signal  
from the VIDEO port or the S-VIDEO port.  
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode.  
• The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals. If the  
picture becomes unstable (e.g. an irregular picture, lack of color),  
please select the mode according to the input signal.  
Using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons changes the M1-D signal mode.  
NORMAL  
ENHANCED  
ó
Feature  
M1-D  
NORMAL  
ENHANCED  
Suitable for DVD signals (ꢀ6-ꢁ35)  
Suitable for VGA signals (0-ꢁ55)  
• If the contrast of the screen image is too strong or too weak, try  
finding a more suitable mode.  
(continued on next page)  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INPUT Menu  
INPUT Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns the frame lock function on/off.  
TURN ON TURN OFF  
ó
• This item can be performed only on an RGB signal with a vertical  
frequency of 50 to 60 Hz.  
• When the TURN ON is selected, a moving pictures are displayed  
more smoothly.  
FRAME LOCK  
• This function may cause a certain degradation of the picture. In  
such a case, please select the TURN OFF.  
Set the RGB input signal type for the RGB port.  
(ꢀ) Use the ◄/► buttons to select the RGB  
port to be set.  
4)$ꢀ+0  
4)$ꢁ  
4)$ꢂ  
5;0%ꢀ10ꢀ)ꢀ10  
5;0%ꢀ10ꢀ)ꢀ1((  
RGBꢀ RGBꢁ  
ó
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the RGB  
input signal type.  
RGB IN  
SYNC ON G ON  
SYNC ON G OFF  
ó
• Selecting the SYNC ON G ON turns the SYNC ON G mode on.  
The SYNC ON G mode allows reception of a sync on G signal.  
• In the SYNC ON G mode, the picture may be distorted with certain  
input signals. In such a case, remove the signal connector so that  
no signal is received and turn the SYNC ON G mode off, and then  
reconnect the signal.  
(continued on next page)  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INPUT Menu  
INPUT Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
The resolution for the RGBꢀ and RGBꢁ input signals can be set on  
this projector.  
(1) In the INPUT menu select the RESOLUTION using the ▲/▼ buttons and  
press the ► button.  
ꢀꢀꢀ4'51.76+10  
The RESOLUTION menu will be displayed.  
#761  
ꢁꢂꢃꢄZꢀꢅꢆꢇ  
ꢁꢃꢇꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ  
ꢁꢈꢆꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ  
(ꢁ) In the RESOLUTION menu select the  
resolution you wish to display using the ▲/▼  
buttons.  
56#0&#4&  
Selecting AUTO will set a resolution  
%7561/  
ꢁꢄꢄꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ  
appropriate to the input signal.  
RESOLUTION MENU  
(3) Pressing the ► or ENTER button when  
selecting a STANDARD resolution will  
automatically adjust the horizontal and  
vertical positions, clock phase and horizontal  
size and automatically select an aspect ratio.  
INFORMATION  
RGBꢀ  
ꢀꢁ80x 768@ 60  
The INFORMATION dialog ( 47) will be  
displayed.  
(4) To set a custom resolution use the  
▲/▼ buttons to select the CUSTOM and  
the CUSTOM RESOLUTION BOX will be  
displayed. Set the horizontal (HORZ) and  
vertical (VERT) resolutions using the  
▲/▼/◄/► buttons.  
%7561/ꢀ4'51.76+10  
ꢁ*14<ꢂꢀZꢀꢁ8'46ꢂ  
RESOLUTION  
ꢃꢄꢄꢅꢀZꢀꢃꢆꢇꢇ  
37+6  
5'6  
CUSTOM RESOLUTION  
BOX  
Although not all resolutions are guaranteed.  
INFORMATION  
RGBꢀ  
(5) To save the setting place the cursor on the  
right-most digit and press the ► button.  
The horizontal and vertical positions,  
clock phase and horizontal size will be  
automatically adjusted and an aspect ratio will  
be automatically selected.  
99ꢁx 744@ 60  
ꢀꢀꢀ4'51.76+10  
#761  
After the INFORMATION( 47) dialog has  
ꢁꢂꢃꢄZꢀꢅꢆꢇ  
ꢁꢃꢇꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ  
ꢁꢈꢆꢂZꢀꢅꢆꢇ  
56#0&#4&  
displayed for about ꢀ0 seconds the screen will  
return to the RESOLUTION menu displaying  
the changed resolution.  
%7561/  
ꢀꢉꢉꢃZꢀꢅꢄꢄ  
(6) To revert back to the previous resolution  
without saving changes place the cursor on  
the left-most digit and press the ◄ button.  
The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu displaying the  
previous resolution.  
• For some pictures, this function may not work well.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP Menu  
SETUP Menu  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢂ5'.'%6ꢀ  
From the SETUP menu, items shown in the table below  
can be performed.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the  
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button  
on the projector or remote control, or the ENTER button  
on the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it  
according to the following table.  
ꢀ#761ꢀ-';5610'ꢀꢀꢀ':'%76'  
ꢀ2+%674'  
ꢀ+/#)'  
ꢀ+0276  
ꢀ5'672  
ꢀ-';5610'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢄ  
ꢀ-';5610'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢄ  
ꢀ9*+52'4ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ014/#.  
ꢀ/+4414ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ014/#.  
ꢀ#7&+1  
ꢀ5%4''0  
ꢀ126+10  
ꢀ/+7  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07  
Item  
Description  
Selecting this item performs the Automatic keystone distortion  
correction. Projector automatically corrects vertical keystone  
distortion due to the (forward/backward) setup angle by itself.  
This function will be executed only once when selected in the menu.  
When the slant of the projector is changed, execute this function  
again.  
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For  
some input, this function may not work well.  
• When V:INVERT or H&V:INVERT is selected to the MIRROR item  
in the SETUP menu, if the projector screen is inclined or angled  
downward, this function may not work correctly.  
• When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus),  
this function may be excessive. This function should be used when  
the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus)  
whenever possible.  
AUTO  
KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE  
• When the projector is placed on the level (about ±3°), this function  
may not work.  
• When the projector is inclined to near ±30 degree or over, this  
function may not work well.  
• When the vertical lens shift is not set fully upward (not set fully  
downward for the optional lens type FL-60ꢀ only ( 46)), this  
function may not work well.  
• When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center, this function  
may not work well.  
• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is  
on ( 52).  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion.  
Shrink the top of the image  
Shrink the bottom of the image  
ó
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For  
some input, this function may not work well.  
• When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center, this function  
may not work well.  
KEYSTONE  
• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is  
on ( 52).  
(continued on next page)  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP Menu  
SETUP Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion.  
Shrink the right of the image Shrink the left of the image  
ó
• The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs. For  
some input, this function may not work well.  
• When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE (telephoto focus),  
this function may be excessive. This function should be used when  
the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE (wide-angle focus)  
whenever possible.  
KEYSTONE  
• When the vertical lens shift is not set fully upward (not set fully  
downward for the optional lens type FL-60ꢀ only ( 46)), this  
function may not work well.  
• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is  
on ( 52).  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns off/on the whisper mode.  
NORMAL  
WHISPER  
ó
WHISPER  
MIRROR  
• When the WHISPER is selected, acoustic noise and screen  
brightness are reduced.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for mirror status.  
NORMAL  
H:INVERT  
V:INVERT  
H&V:INVERT  
ó
ó
ó
If the Transition Detector is TURN ON and MIRROR status is  
changed, Transition Detector Alarm ( 52) will be displayed when  
projector is restarted after the power switch is turned off.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO Menu  
AUDIO Menu  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢀ2+%674'ꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6ꢀ  
ꢁꢃ  
ꢄꢅ  
ꢄꢅ  
From the AUDIO menu, items shown in the table below can  
be performed.  
ꢀ81.7/'  
ꢀ64'$.'  
ꢀ$#55  
+/#)'ꢀ  
ꢀ+0276ꢀ  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the  
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button  
on the projector or remote control, or ENTER button on  
the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it  
according to the following table.  
ꢀ545ꢀ919  
ꢀ52'#-'4  
ꢀ#7&+1  
/+&  
6740ꢀ10  
ꢀ5'672  
ꢀ#7&+1  
ꢀ5%4''0  
ꢀ126+10  
ꢀ/+7  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07  
NOTE • The speaker sound may distorted or the case may be trembling  
when the volume is too high or treble/bass is emphasized or WOW is activated.  
In that case, make the volume reduced, bass/treble low or WOW effect to be  
weakend.  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the volume.  
VOLUME  
High  
Low  
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the treble level.  
High Low  
TREBLE  
BASS  
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the bass level.  
High Low  
ó
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for SRS WOW mode.  
HIGH MID OFF  
ó ó  
SRS WOW  
• SRS WOW™ accomplishes this by providing a panoramic three-  
dimensional audio image that extends the sound field in both the  
horizontal and vertical planes, and lowers the perceived bass  
response well beyond the low frequency limitations of the drivers.  
Adjust it depending on the user's preference.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns the speaker function on/off.  
SPEAKER  
TURN ON  
TURN OFF  
ó
• When the TURN ON is selected the built-in speaker works.  
Allocates the audio ports.  
ꢀ#7&+1  
(1) Choose a picture input port using the ▲/▼  
buttons.  
ꢀꢀꢀ37+6ꢀ  
ꢀꢀ  
ꢀ4)$ꢂꢀ  
4)$ꢁ  
ꢀ/ꢂꢃ&  
RGBꢀ RGBꢁ Mꢀ-D MIU  
ó
ó
ó
ꢀ%1/210'06  
ꢀ5ꢃ8+&'1  
ꢀ8+&'1  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
ó
ó
AUDIO  
(ꢁ) Select the audio port to be interlocked with  
the input port using the ◄/► buttons.  
3
4
M
ó ó ó ó ó  
“M” is abbreviation of MIU. When is selected to an input port, any  
audio ports do not work interlocking with the input port, and any  
items in AUDIO menu are invalid.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCREEN Menu  
SCREEN Menu  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6ꢀ  
From the SCREEN menu, items shown in the table below  
can be performed.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the  
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button  
on the projector or remote control, or ENTER button on  
the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it  
according to the following table.  
ꢀ.#0)7#)'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ'0).+5*ꢀ  
ꢀ2+%674'  
ꢀ+/#)'  
ꢀ+0276  
ꢀ5'672  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ215+6+10ꢀ  
$.#0-ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ$.#%-  
56#46ꢀ72ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ14+)+0#.  
ꢀ/[5ETGGP  
ꢀ/[5ETGGPꢀ.QEMꢀ6740ꢀ1((  
ꢀ#7&+1  
ꢀ5%4''0  
ꢀ126+10  
ꢀ/'55#)'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ10  
ꢀ5174%'ꢀ0#/'  
ꢀ/+7  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the OSD (On Screen Display) language.  
ENGLISH óFRANÇAIS óDEUTSCH óESPAÑOL óITALIANO  
NORSK óNEDERLANDS óPORTUGUÊS ó日本語  
LANGUAGE  
ó
ó óSVENSKA ó  
SUOMI óPOLSKI óTÜRKÇE  
Using the ◄/►/▲/▼ buttons adjusts the menu position.  
MENU POSITION To quit the operation, press the MENU button on the remote control  
or keep no operation for about ꢀ0 seconds.  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the blank screen.  
The blank screen is a screen for the temporarily blanking feature  
(
23). It is displayed by pressing the BLANK button on the remote  
control.  
MyScreen  
ORIGINAL  
BLUE  
WHITE  
BLACK  
ó
ó
ó
ó
Feature  
Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item  
BLANK  
MyScreen  
ORIGINAL  
.
41)  
(
Screen preset as the standard screen.  
BLUE, WHITE,  
BLACK  
Plain screens in each color.  
To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL  
screen will change to the plain black screen after several minutes.  
(continued on next page)  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCREEN Menu  
SCREEN Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the mode for the start-up screen.  
The start-up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an  
unsuitable signal is detected.  
MyScreen  
ORIGINAL  
TURN OFF  
ó
ó
Feature  
Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item  
MyScreen  
.
41)  
(
START UP  
ORIGINAL  
TURN OFF  
Screen preset as the standard screen.  
Plain black screen.  
To avoid remaining as an afterimage, the MyScreen or ORIGINAL  
screen will change to the BLANK screen ( 39) after several  
minutes. If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL,  
the plain black screen is instead used.  
• When the TURN ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWARD of  
SECURITY item in OPTION menu ( 49), the START UP is fixed to  
MyScreen.  
(continued on next page)  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCREEN Menu  
SCREEN Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
This item allows you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen  
image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP  
screen. Display the image you want to capture before executing the  
following procedure.  
ꢀ. Selecting this item displays a dialog  
/[5ETGGP  
&Qꢀ[QWꢀUVCTVꢀECRVWTKPIꢀVJKUꢀRKEVWTG!  
titled “MyScreen”. It will ask you if  
you start capturing an image from the  
current screen.  
'
5
%
ꢀꢁꢀꢂ01ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢂ;'5  
'06  
Please wait for the target image to be displayed, and press  
the ENTER button on the remote control when the image is  
displayed. The image will freeze and the frame for capturing will  
appear.  
To stop performing, press the RESET or ESC button on the  
remote control.  
2. Using the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons adjusts  
the frame position.  
Please move the frame to the position  
of the image which you want to use. The  
frame may not be able to be moved for  
/[5ETGGP  
/QXGꢀVJGꢀECRVWTGꢀCTGC  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀCUꢀ[QWꢀYCPVꢁ  
MyScreen  
ꢂꢀꢃꢀꢄ4'6740ꢀꢀꢂꢀꢄ0':6  
4'5'6  
'06'4  
some input signals.  
To start registration, press the ENTER  
button on the remote control.  
/[5ETGGP  
ٕ
ٌ
ꢀꢁꢂ  
To restore the screen and return to the previous dialog, press the  
RESET or ESC button on the remote control.  
Registration takes several minutes.  
When the registration is completed, the registered screen and the  
following message is displayed for several seconds:  
“MyScreen registration is finished.”  
If the registration failed, the following message is displayed:  
“A capturing error has occurred. Please try again.”  
• This item cannot be selected for an Mꢀ-D signal.  
• This function cannot be selected when the TURN ON is selected  
to the MyScreen Lock item ( below).  
• This function cannot be selected when the TURN ON is selected  
to the MyScreen PASSWARD of SECURITY item in OPTION menu  
(
49).  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the MyScreen lock function.  
TURN ON TURN OFF  
ó
When the TURN ON is selected, the item MyScreen is locked. Use  
MyScreen Lock this function for protecting the current MyScreen.  
• This function cannot be selected when the TURN ON is selected  
to the MyScreen PASSWARD of SECURITY item in OPTION menu  
49).  
(
(continued on next page)  
4ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCREEN Menu  
SCREEN Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the message function.  
TURN ON TURN OFF  
ó
When the TURN ON is selected, the following message function works.  
“AUTO IN PROGRESS” while automatically adjusting  
“NO INPUT IS DETECTED”  
“SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE”  
“Searching….” while searching for the input  
“Detecting….” while an input signal is detected  
The indication of the input signal displayed by changing  
The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing  
The indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changing  
The indication of the ACTIVE IRIS displayed by changing  
The indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by changing  
The indication of "FREEZE" and "II" while freezing the screen by  
pressing the FREEZE button.  
MESSAGE  
• When the TURN OFF is selected, please remember if the picture  
is freezing. Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction ( 22).  
Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it.  
(ꢀ) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SCREEN menu to  
5174%'ꢀ0#/'  
select SOURCE NAME and press the  
button.  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ4)$ꢁꢀꢂꢀ  
The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed.  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ4)$ꢃꢀꢂꢀ&'5-612ꢀ2%  
%1/210'06ꢀꢂꢀ&8&  
ꢀꢀ5ꢄ8+&'1ꢀꢂꢀ%#/'4#  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀ8+&'1ꢀꢂꢀ864  
(2) Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SOURCE  
NAME menu to select the port to be named  
and press the ► button. Right side of the  
menu is blank until a name is specified.  
The SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed.  
ꢁ5'.'%6ꢀ  
ꢀ0#/'ꢁꢀ4)$ꢂ  
ꢀ4ꢀ)ꢀ$ꢀꢂ  
#ꢀ$ꢀ%ꢀ&ꢀ'ꢀ(ꢀ)ꢀ*ꢀ+ꢀ,ꢀ-ꢀ.ꢀ/ꢀ0  
1ꢀ2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5ꢀ6ꢀ7ꢀ8ꢀ9ꢀ:ꢀ;ꢀ<  
CꢀDꢀEꢀFꢀGꢀHꢀIꢀJꢀKꢀLꢀMꢀNꢀOꢀP  
QꢀRꢀSꢀTꢀUꢀVꢀWꢀXꢀYꢀZꢀ[ꢀ\  
ꢃꢀꢂꢀꢄꢀꢅꢀꢆꢀꢇꢀꢈꢀꢉꢀꢊꢀꢋ  
(3) The current name will be displayed on the  
first line. Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons and the  
ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter  
characters. The RESET button can be used to  
erase ꢀ character at a time. The name can be a  
maximum of ꢀ6 characters.  
ꢀꢀꢌꢀAꢀꢍꢀꢎꢀꢏꢀ!ꢀꢐ  
'5%ꢀꢑꢀꢀꢀꢒꢀꢀꢀꢁ37+6  
'06'4ꢀꢑꢀꢁ0':6  
ꢁ5'.'%6ꢀ  
ꢀ0#/'ꢁꢀ4)$ꢂ  
ꢀ4ꢀ)ꢀ$ꢀꢂ  
SOURCE NAME  
#ꢀ$ꢀ%ꢀ&ꢀ'ꢀ(ꢀ)ꢀ*ꢀ+ꢀ,ꢀ-ꢀ.ꢀ/ꢀ0  
(4) To change an already inserted character, press  
1ꢀ2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5ꢀ6ꢀ7ꢀ8ꢀ9ꢀ:ꢀ;ꢀ<  
CꢀDꢀEꢀFꢀGꢀHꢀIꢀJꢀKꢀLꢀMꢀNꢀOꢀP  
QꢀRꢀSꢀTꢀUꢀVꢀWꢀXꢀYꢀZꢀ[ꢀ\  
ꢃꢀꢂꢀꢄꢀꢅꢀꢆꢀꢇꢀꢈꢀꢉꢀꢊꢀꢋ  
the  
button while the cursor is on the [A-N]  
row to move the cursor to the name displayed on  
the first line and use the ◄/► buttons to select  
character to be changed. Once a character in the  
ꢀꢀꢌꢀAꢀꢍꢀꢎꢀꢏꢀ!ꢀꢐ  
'5%ꢀꢑꢀꢀꢀꢒꢀꢀꢀꢁ37+6  
ꢁ5'.'%6ꢀ  
ꢀ0#/'ꢁꢀ4)$ꢂ  
ꢀ4ꢀ)ꢀ$ꢀꢂ  
name is selected use the  
button to move the  
cursor back down to the character entry area to  
select and enter characters as described above.  
#ꢀ$ꢀ%ꢀ&ꢀ'ꢀ(ꢀ)ꢀ*ꢀ+ꢀ,ꢀ-ꢀ.ꢀ/ꢀ0  
1ꢀ2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5ꢀ6ꢀ7ꢀ8ꢀ9ꢀ:ꢀ;ꢀ<  
CꢀDꢀEꢀFꢀGꢀHꢀIꢀJꢀKꢀLꢀMꢀNꢀOꢀP  
QꢀRꢀSꢀTꢀUꢀVꢀWꢀXꢀYꢀZꢀ[ꢀ\  
ꢃꢀꢂꢀꢄꢀꢅꢀꢆꢀꢇꢀꢈꢀꢉꢀꢊꢀꢋ  
(5) Select and press the ENTER or  
INPUT buttons when finished entering text.  
To revert to the previous name without  
saving changes press the ESC or ◄ button  
and the INPUT button simultaneously.  
ꢀꢀꢌꢀAꢀꢍꢀꢎꢀꢏꢀ!ꢀꢐ  
'5%ꢀꢑꢀꢀꢀꢒꢀꢀꢀꢁ37+6  
'06'4ꢀꢑꢀꢁ0':6  
4ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION Menu  
OPTION Menu  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6ꢀ  
From the OPTION menu, items shown in the table below can be  
performed.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the projector or  
remote control, and press the ► cursor button on the projector or  
remote control, or ENTER button on the remote control to execute  
the item, except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER TIME.  
Then perform it according to the following table.  
ꢀ#761ꢀ5'#4%*ꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((  
ꢀ2+%674'  
ꢀ+/#)'  
ꢀ+0276  
ꢀ5'672  
#761ꢀ-';5610'ꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((  
ꢀ#761ꢀ10ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((  
ꢀ#761ꢀ1((ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃOKP  
ꢀ.#/2ꢀ6+/'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃJ  
ꢀ(+.6'4ꢀ6+/'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃJ  
/;ꢀ$76610  
ꢀ#7&+1  
ꢀ5%4''0  
ꢀ126+10  
ꢀ/+7  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07  
ꢀ5'48+%'  
ꢀ5'%74+6;  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic signal search function.  
TURN ON TURN OFF  
ó
When the TURN ON is selected, detecting no signal automatically cycles  
through input ports in the following order. The search is started from the  
current port. Then when an input is found, the projector will stop searching  
and display the image.  
AUTO SEARCH  
RGB ꢀ RGB ꢁ Mꢀ-D MIU COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO  
ð ð  
ð
ð
ð
ð
• The MIU input is skipped, as long as no image is sent from PC on  
the “Live Mode” ( 54).  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the automatic keystone function.  
TURN ON  
TURN OFF  
ó
TURN ON : Automatic keystone distortion correction will be  
executed whenever changing the slant of the projector.  
TURN OFF : This function is disabled. Please execute the AUTO  
AUTO  
KEYSTONE  
KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE in the SETUP Menu for automatic  
keystone distortion correction.  
• When the projector is suspended from the ceiling this feature will  
not function properly so select the TURN OFF.  
• This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is  
on  
(
52).  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the AUTO ON function.  
TURN ON TURN OFF  
ó
When AUTO ON is set to TURN ON, the projector’s lamp will only  
be automatically turned on when the Power switch is turned on if  
the power was turned off using the Power switch the last time the  
projector was turned off.  
AUTO ON  
• After turning the lamp on by the AUTO ON function, if neither input nor  
operation is detected for about 30 minutes, the projector is turned off, even  
though the AUTO OFF function  
(
44) is disabled.  
(continued on next page)  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION Menu  
OPTION Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons adjusts the time to count down to  
automatically turn the projector off.  
Long (max. 99 minutes)  
Short (min. 0 minute = DISABLE)  
ó
AUTO OFF  
AUTO OFF  
ENABLE  
DISABLE  
0
When the time is set to 0, the projector is not turned off automatically.  
When the time is set to ꢀ to 99, and when the passed time with no-  
signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time, the projector  
lamp will be turned off.  
AUTO OFF  
If one of the projector's buttons or the remote control buttons  
is pressed or one of the commands (except get commands) is  
transmitted to the control port during the corresponding time,  
projector will not be turned off.  
Please refer to the section “Turning off the power” ( 17).  
The lamp time is the time counted after the last resetting. It is  
shown in the OPTION menu as the usage time of the lamp.  
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ► button  
of the projector displays a dialog.  
To reset the lamp time, select the RESET using the ▲ button.  
LAMP TIME  
RESET CANCEL  
• Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,  
for a suitable indication about the lamp.  
• For the lamp replacement, see the section "Lamp" ( 59, 60).  
The filter time is the time counted after the last resetting. It is shown  
in the OPTION menu as the usage time of the air filter.  
Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the ► button  
of the projector displays a dialog.  
To reset the filter time, select the RESET using the ▲ button.  
FILTER TIME  
RESET CANCEL  
Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced  
the air filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.  
For the air filter cleaning, see the section "Air filter" ( 61, 62).  
(continued on next page)  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION Menu  
OPTION Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
This item is to assign one of the following function to MY BUTTON  
ꢀ and ꢁ on the remote control ( 6).  
Choose 1 or 2 on the MY BUTTON menu using the ◄/► button  
first. Then using the ▲/▼ buttons sets one of the following functions  
to the chosen button.  
• RGBꢀ: Sets port to RGBꢀ.  
• RGBꢁ: Sets port to RGBꢁ.  
• Mꢀ-D: Sets port to Mꢀ-D.  
• MIU: Sets port to MIU.  
• COMPONENT: Sets port to COMPONENT (Y, Cb/Pb, Cr/Pr).  
• S-VIDEO: Sets port to S-VIDEO.  
• VIDEO: Sets port to VIDEO.  
• e-SHOT: Displays the e-SHOT menu ( 55).  
INFORMATION: Displays a dialog of INPUT INFORMATION  
(
58).  
• AUTO KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE:  
Performs automatic keystone distortion correction ( 36).  
MY BUTTON  
• MY MEMORY:  
Loads one of adjustment data stored ( 29).  
When the current adjustment is not saved to memory a dialog is displayed.  
6GORQTCT[ꢀEQPFKVKQP  
/'/14;ꢀꢁꢀ4GECNNꢀUCXGFꢀRCTCOGVGTU  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀ3WKV  
0QꢀUCXGFꢀFCVC  
If you want to keep the current adjustment, please press the ◄  
button to quit. Otherwise the current adjusted condition will be lost  
by loading a data.  
• PICTURE MODE: Changes the PICTURE MODE ( 25).  
• FILTER RESET:  
Displays the filter time reset confirmation dialogue ( 44).  
• ACTIVE IRIS: Changes the active iris mode.  
• VOLUME+: Set the volume up.  
• VOLUME-: Set the volume down.  
Selecting this item displays the SERVICE menu.  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ buttons, and press the ► button or  
the ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item.  
FAN SPEED  
AUTO ADJUST  
GHOST  
ó ó  
FILTER MESSAGE  
LENS TYPE  
KEY LOCK  
ó
ó
ó
FACTORY RESET  
INFORMATION  
REMOTE FREQ.  
REMOTE RECEIV.  
ó
ó
ó
SERVICE  
FAN SPEED  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons switches the rotation speed  
of the cooling fans. The HIGH is the mode for use at  
highlands etc. Note that the projector is noisier when  
the HIGH is selected.  
(#052''&  
*+)*  
014/#.  
HIGH  
NORMAL  
ó
(continued on next page)  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION Menu  
OPTION Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
AUTO ADJUST  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons enables/disables the  
automatic adjustment.When DISABLE is selected,  
the automatic adjustment feature is disabled,  
although rough adjustment is automatically performed  
depending on the basic setting.  
#761ꢀ#&,756  
'0#$.'  
&+5#$.'  
ENABLE  
DISABLE  
ó
• Depending on conditions, such as input image, signal cable to  
the projector, environment around the projector, etc., the automatic  
adjustment may not work correctly. In such a case, please  
choose DISABLE to disable the automatic adjustment, and make  
adjustment manually.  
GHOST  
4
)
$
1. Select a color element of ghost using the ◄/►  
buttons.  
ꢀꢁ ꢀꢁ ꢀꢁ  
)*156  
ꢁ. Adjust the selected element using the ▲/▼ buttons to  
disappear ghost.  
FILTER MESSAGE  
Use the ▲/▼ button to set the timer for the interval to  
show the message for cleaning up the air filter.  
(+.6'4ꢀ/'55#)'  
ꢃꢂJ  
ꢁꢂꢂJ  
50h  
ꢀ00h TURN OFF  
ꢁ00h  
300h  
ó ó ó ó  
ꢄꢂꢂJ  
ꢅꢂꢂJ  
After selecting “50h”, “ꢀ00h”, “ꢁ00h”, or “300h”, the  
message “REMINDER HRS PASSED AFTER THE  
6740ꢀ1((  
***  
SERVICE  
(continued)  
LAST FILTER CHECK” will appear after the timer  
reaches the interval time set by the menu.  
(
63) When the “TURN OFF” is chosen, the air filter  
cleaning message will not appear.  
Please check and clean the air filter periodically, even if there is no  
message. If the air filter becomes to be blocked by dust or others,  
the internal temperature will rise, which could cause malfunction, or  
reduce the lifetime of the projector.  
• It is recommended to choose “ꢀ00h” in general. Please be careful  
with the operating environment of the projector and the condition of  
the air filter, especially when the “200h”, “300h” or “TURN OFF” is  
chosen.  
LENS TYPE  
Select the lens type currently used using the ▲/▼  
.'05ꢀ6;2'  
buttons.  
3
4
5
ó ó ó ó  
Please select one of them referring to the following.  
ꢀ: for a standard lens (Type NL-600)  
2: for a fixed short throw lens (Type FL-601)  
3: for a short throw lens (Type SL-60ꢁ)  
4: for a long throw lens (Type LL-603)  
5: for an ultra long throw lens (Type UL-604)  
This setting has an influence on the keystone distortion etc.  
• About the optional lens, ask you dealer.  
(continued on next page)  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION Menu  
OPTION Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
KEY LOCK  
Using the ▲/▼ buttons turns on/off the key lock feature. When  
TURN ON is selected, the buttons on the projector except the  
STANDBY/ON button are locked.  
TURN ON  
TURN OFF  
ó
• Please use to avoid a mischief and touching accidentally. This  
function does not have any effect on the remote control.  
REMOTE RECEIV.  
(1) Select a remote sensor using the ▲/▼ button.  
ꢀ:FRONT  
ꢁ:TOP  
3:REAR  
ó
ó
㪜㪥㪫㪜㪩  
ꢅꢀꢆ  
(ꢁ) Switch it using the ENTER button  
4'/16'ꢀ4'%'+8ꢄ  
(off) (on)  
¨ óþ  
ꢀꢁꢂ(4106  
ꢀꢃꢂ612  
ꢇꢂ4'#4  
• A sensor cannot be turned off when the other  
two are off. Always at least one sensor is on.  
REMOTE FREQ.  
Use the ▲/▼ button to change the Projector's remote sensor  
setting ( 15).  
ꢀ:NORMAL  
ꢁ:HIGH  
ó
Items with a checkmark are on. The factory  
default setting is for both ꢀ:NORMAL and ꢁ:  
HIGH to be on. If the remote control does not  
function correctly set the this to either only  
ꢀ or only ꢁ as described in Remote Control  
㪜㪥㪫㪜㪩  
ꢀꢅꢀꢆ  
4'/16'ꢀ(4'3ꢁ  
ꢀꢂꢃ014/#.  
ꢀꢄꢃ*+)*  
SERVICE  
(continued)  
Settings ( 15).  
Neither can be turned off at the same time.  
INFORMATION  
Selecting this item displays a dialog titled “INPUT INFORMATION”.  
It shows the information about the current input.  
INPUT-INFORMATION  
RGBꢀ  
ꢀ0ꢁ4x768 @60Hz  
FRAME LOCK  
INPUT-INFORMATION  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT-INFORMATION  
COMPONENT  
576i @50  
SECAM  
AUTO  
SCART RGB  
• The “FRAME LOCK” message on the dialog means the frame lock  
function is working.  
• The “SCART RGB” message means the COMPONENT VIDEO  
port is working as a SCART RGB input port. Please refer to the  
COMPONENT item in INPUT menu ( 33).  
• This item can't be selected for no signal and sync out.  
FACTORY RESET  
Selecting RESET using the button ▲ performs this function. By  
this function, all the items in all of menus will collectively return to  
the initial setting. Note that the items LAMP TIME, FILTER TIME,  
LANGUAGE and SECURITY are not reset.  
RESET CANCEL  
(continued on next page)  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION Menu  
OPTION Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
This projector is equipped with security functions.  
User registration is required before using the security functions.  
Please contact your local dealer.  
1. Using Security Features  
1.1 Inputting the PASSWORD  
1.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the OPTION  
menu to select SECURITY and press the ►  
button. The ENTER PASSWORD box will be  
displayed. The factory default PASSWORD is  
2400. This PASSWORD can be changed (ꢀ.ꢁ  
5'%74+6;  
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&  
Changing the PASSWORD).  
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ  
• It is strongly recommended the factory default  
PASSWORD to be changed as soon as possible.  
37+6  
0':6  
ENTER PASSWORD  
BOX  
1.1-2 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the  
registered PASSWORD. Move the cursor to  
the right side of the ENTER PASSWORD  
BOX and press the ► button to display the  
SECURITY menu. If an incorrect PASSWORD  
is input the ENTER PASSWORD BOX will  
be displayed again. If incorrect PASSWORD  
is input 3 times the projector will turn off.  
Afterwards the projector will turn off every time  
an incorrect PASSWORD is input.  
ꢀ5'%74+6;  
5'%74+6;ꢀ2#55914&ꢀ%*#0)'  
/[5ETGGPꢀ2#55914&ꢀ6740ꢀ1((  
2+0ꢀ.1%-ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ6740ꢀ1((  
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614ꢀ6740ꢀ1((  
ꢀꢀꢀ  
SECURITY MENU  
SECURITY  
5'%74+6;  
'06'4ꢀ0'9ꢀ2#55914&  
1.2 Changing the PASSWORD  
1.2-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu  
to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE  
and press the ► button to display the ENTER  
NEW PASSWORD BOX.  
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ  
37+6  
0':6  
ENTER NEW PASSWORD  
BOX  
1.2-2 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the new  
PASSWORD.  
5'%74+6;  
0'9ꢀ2#55914&ꢀ#)#+0  
ꢀ.ꢁ-3 Move the cursor to the right side of the  
ENTER NEW PASSWORD BOX and press  
the ► button to display the NEW PASSWORD  
AGAIN BOX, enter the same PASSWORD  
again.  
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ  
%#0%'.  
1-  
NEW PASSWORD  
AGAIN BOX  
ꢀ.ꢁ-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW  
PASSWORD AGAIN BOX and press the ►  
button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD BOX  
will be displayed for about ꢁ0 seconds, please  
make note of the PASSWORD during this time.  
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote  
controll or INPUT button on the projector will  
close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD BOX.  
• Please do not forget your PASSWORD.  
5'%74+6;  
016'ꢀ0'9ꢀ2#55914&  
ꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂ  
'06'4ꢀꢃ ꢁ':+6  
NOTE NEW  
PASSWORD BOX  
(continued on next page)  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION Menu  
OPTION Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
1.3 If you have forgotten your PASSWORD  
ꢀ.3-ꢀ Follow the procedure in ꢀ.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the  
ENTER PASSWORD BOX.  
ꢀ.3-ꢁ While the ENTER PASSWORD BOX is  
displayed, press and hold the RESET button  
on the remote control for about 3 seconds or  
press and hold the INPUT and ► buttons on  
the projector for about 3 seconds.  
The ꢀ0 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed.  
• If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while  
the Inquiring Code is displayed the menu will close.  
If necessary repeat the process from ꢀ.3-ꢀ.  
ꢀ5'%74+6;ꢀ2#55914&  
+PSWKTKPIꢀ%QFG  
ꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁ  
Inquiring Code  
(PASSWORD)  
ꢀ.3-3 Contact your dealer with the ꢀ0 digit Inquiring Code. Your PASSWORD  
will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.  
2. Using the MyScreen PASSWORD Function  
The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the  
MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image  
from being overwritten.  
SECURITY  
(continued)  
2.1 Turning on the MyScreen  
Function  
2.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY  
menu to select MyScreen PASSWORD and  
press the ► button to display the MyScreen  
PASSWORD on/off menu.  
PASSWORD  
/[5ETGGPꢀ2#55914&  
6740ꢀ10  
6740ꢀ1((  
MyScreen PASSWORD  
on/off menu  
2.2 Setting the PASSWORD  
ꢁ.ꢁ-ꢀ Display the MyScreen on/off menu using the  
procedure in ꢁ.ꢀ-ꢀ.  
/[5ETGGP  
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&  
2.2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the MyScreen  
PASSWORD on/off menu to select TURN ON.  
The ENTER PASSWORD BOX (small) will be  
displayed.  
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ  
37+6  
0':6  
ENTER PASSWORD  
BOX (small)  
2.2-3 Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the  
PASSWORD. Move the cursor to the right  
side of the ENTER PASSWORD BOX  
(small) and press the ► button to display the  
CHECK PASSWORD BOX, enter the same  
PASSWORD again.  
/[5ETGGP  
%*'%-ꢀ2#55914&  
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ  
37+6  
0':6  
CHECK PASSWORD  
BOX  
(continued on next page)  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION Menu  
OPTION Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
ꢁ.ꢁ-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the  
CHECK PASSWORD BOX and press the  
► button to display the PASSWORD for  
about ꢁ0 seconds, please make note of the  
PASSWORD during this time.  
/[5ETGGP  
%1/2.'6'  
ꢁꢂꢂꢁꢂꢂꢁꢂꢂꢁ  
'06'4ꢂꢃ ꢀ':+6  
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control  
or INPUT button on the projector will return to  
MyScreen PASS WORD on/off menu.  
PASSWORD BOX  
When a PASSWORD is set for MyScreen:  
The MyScreen registration function (and menu) will be unavailable.  
The MyScreen Lock function (and menu) will be unavailable.  
The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen (and the menu will be  
unavailable).  
Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of both  
functions.  
Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD.  
2.3 Turning the PASSWORD off  
ꢁ.3-ꢀ Follow the procedure in ꢁ.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the MyScreen PASSWORD  
on/off menu.  
ꢁ.3-ꢁ Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD BOX (large).  
Enter the registered PASSWORD and the screen will return to the  
MyScreen on/off menu.  
If an incorrect PASSWORD is input the menu will close. If necessary repeat  
the process from ꢁ.3-ꢀ.  
SECURITY  
(continued)  
2.4 If you have forgotten your PASSWORD  
ꢁ.4-ꢀ Follow the procedure in ꢁ.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the MyScreen PASSWORD  
on/off menu.  
/[5ETGGP  
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&  
ꢁ.4-ꢁ Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER  
+PSWKTKPIꢀ%QFG  
ꢀꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢆꢇꢈꢉꢊ  
PASSWORD BOX (large). The ꢀ0 digit  
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the  
BOX.  
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ  
37+6  
0':6  
ENTER PASSWORD BOX  
(large)  
ꢁ.4-3 Contact your dealer with the ꢀ0 digit Inquiring  
Code. Your PASSWORD will be sent after  
your user registration information is confirmed.  
3. Using the PIN LOCK Function  
PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless  
a registered Code is input.  
3.1 Registering the PIN Code  
3.1-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu  
2+0ꢀ.1%-  
to select PIN LOCK and press the ► button  
or the ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK  
6740ꢀ10  
6740ꢀ1((  
on/off menu.  
PIN LOCK on/off  
menu  
3.1-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the PIN LOCK on/off  
menu to select TURN ON and the PIN BOX  
will be displayed.  
(continued on next page)  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION Menu  
OPTION Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
3.1-3 Input a 4 part PIN Code using the ▲/▼/◄/►  
/RGB and INPUT buttons.  
A CONFIRMATION BOX will appear. Reenter the  
same PIN Code. This will complete the PIN Code  
registration.  
ꢀ2+0ꢀ$1:  
+PRWVꢀ2+0ꢀ%QFG  
ꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢃꢀꢃꢀꢃ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀ4)$ꢀꢂꢀ  
PIN BOX  
If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while  
the PIN BOX or the CONFIRMATION BOX are  
displayed the menu will close. If necessary repeat  
the process from 3.ꢀ-ꢀ.  
ꢀ2+0ꢀ$1:  
%QPHKTOCVKQP  
ꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢃꢀꢃꢀꢃ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀ4)$ꢀꢂꢀ  
Afterwards, anytime the projector is restarted after  
the power switch is turned off the PIN BOX will be  
displayed. Enter the registered PIN Code.  
The projector can be used after entering the  
registered PIN Code. If an incorrect PIN Code is  
input the PIN BOX will be displayed again.  
CONFIRMATION BOX  
(PIN BOX)  
If an incorrect PIN Code is input 3 times the projector will turn off. Afterwards  
the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN Code is input. The  
projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while  
the PIN BOX is displayed.  
This function will activate only when the projector is started after the power  
switch was turned off.  
SECURITY  
(continued)  
Please do not forget your PIN Code.  
3.2 Turning Off the PIN LOCK Function  
3.ꢁ-ꢀ Follow the procedure in 3.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the PIN LOCK on/off menu.  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select TURN OFF and the PIN BOX will be  
displayed.  
Enter the registered PIN Code to turn the PIN LOCK function off.  
If an incorrect PASSWORD is entered the menu will close.  
3.3 If you have forgotten your PIN Code  
3.3-ꢀ While the PIN BOX is displayed, press and  
ꢀ2+0ꢀ$1:  
hold the RESET button for three seconds or  
press and hold the INPUT and ► buttons for  
three seconds. The ꢀ0 digit Inquiring Code will  
be displayed.  
+PSWKTKPIꢀ%QFG  
ꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁꢀꢁ  
Inquiring Code  
(PIN Code)  
If there is no key input for about 5 minutes while  
the Inquiring Code is displayed the projector will turn  
off.  
3.3-ꢁ Contact your dealer with the ꢀ0 digit Inquiring Code. Your PASSWORD  
will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed.  
(continued on next page)  
5ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION Menu  
OPTION Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
4. Using the Transition Detector Function  
While the Transition Detector function is ON, when power switch is started to  
supply to the projector, it might react as below.  
• Transition Detector alarm shown below might appear on screen, if the  
projector has been moved or re-installed.  
• Transition Detector alarm might appear on screen, if the MIRROR setting  
has been changed.  
• Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition  
Detector function is ON.  
4.1 Turning On the  
Function  
Transition Detector  
4.ꢀ-ꢀ Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to  
select Transition Detector and press the ► or the  
ENTER button to display the Transition Detector  
on/off menu. Select TURN ON and the current  
angle and mirror setting will be recorded.  
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614  
6740ꢀ10  
6740ꢀ1((  
Transition Detector  
on/off menu  
This feature may not function properly if the projector is  
not in a stable position when TURN ON is selected.  
ꢁꢁ64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614ꢀ10    
4.ꢀ-ꢁ If this function is set to TURN ON when the  
vertical angle of the projector or mirror setting  
at which the projector is turned on is different  
than the previously recorded the Transition  
Detector Alarm will be displayed and the  
projector will not display the input signal.  
6JGꢀRTQLGEVQTꢀJCUꢀDGGPꢀVTCPUHGTTGF  
HTQOꢀRTGXKQWUN[ꢀKPUVCNNGFꢀRQUKVKQPꢂ  
ꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀ2+0ꢀ$1:  
+Hꢀ[QWꢀYKUJꢀVQꢀJCXGꢀCꢀUSWCTGꢀKOCIG  
QPꢀUETGGPꢀCICKPꢃ  
FKUCDNGꢀ6TCPUKVKQPꢀ&GVGEVQTꢀQPꢀ/GPWꢂ  
Transition Detector Alarm  
Set the Transition Detector off I the SECURITY menu to display the input signal.  
If the Transition Detector ALARM is displayed for about 5 minutes the lamp will turn off.  
This function will activate only when the projector is started after the power  
switch was turned off.  
SECURITY  
(continued)  
4.2 Setting the  
PASSWORD  
Transition Detector  
4.2-1 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the SECURITY menu to select Transition  
Detector and press the ► or the ENTER button to display the  
Transition Detector on/off menu.  
4.2-2 Use the ▲/▼ buttons on the Transition  
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614  
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&  
Detector on/off menu to select TURN ON.  
The ENTER PASSWORD BOX (small) will be  
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ  
displayed.  
37+6  
0':6  
ENTER PASSWORD  
BOX (small)  
4.ꢁ-3 Use the  
/
/
/
buttons to enter a  
PASSWORD. Move the cursor to the right side of  
the ENTER PASSWORD BOX (small) and press  
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614  
%*'%-ꢀ2#55914&  
the  
button to display the CHECK PASSWORD  
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ  
BOX, enter the same PASSWORD again.  
37+6  
0':6  
4.ꢁ-4 Move the cursor to the right side of the  
CHECK PASSWORD BOX and press the  
► button to display the PASSWORD for  
about ꢁ0 seconds, please make note of the  
PASSWORD during this time.  
CHECK PASSWORD  
BOX  
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614  
%1/2.'6'  
ꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂ  
Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or  
the INPUT button on the projector will return to the  
Transition Detector on/off menu.  
'06'4ꢀꢃ ꢁ':+6  
PASSWORD BOX  
• Please do not forget your Transition Detector PASSWORD.  
(continued on next page)  
5ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OPTION Menu  
OPTION Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
4.3 Setting the Transition Detector off  
4.3-ꢀ Follow the procedure in 4.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the Transition Detector on/off  
menu.  
4.3-ꢁ Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD BOX (large).  
Enter the registered PASSWORD and the screen will return to the  
Transition Detector on/off menu.  
If an incorrect PASSWORD is input the menu will close. If necessary repeat  
the process from 4.3-ꢀ.  
SECURITY  
(continued)  
4.4 If you have forgotten your PASSWORD  
4.4-ꢀ Follow the procedure in 4.ꢀ-ꢀ to display the Transition Detector on/off  
menu.  
64#05+6+10ꢀ&'6'%614  
4.4-ꢁ Select TURN OFF to display the ENTER  
'06'4ꢀ2#55914&  
PASSWORD BOX (large). The ꢀ0 digit  
Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the  
BOX.  
+PSWKTKPIꢀ%QFG  
ꢀꢀꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢆꢇꢈꢉꢊ  
ꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁ  
0':6  
37+6  
ENTER PASSWORD BOX  
(large)  
4.4-3 Contact your dealer with the ꢀ0 digit Inquiring  
Code. Your PASSWORD will be sent after your  
user registration information is confirmed.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIU Menu  
MIU Menu  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢀꢂ5'.'%6  
Consult with your network administrator before connecting  
to an existing access point on your network. Incorrect  
network settings on this projector may cause trouble on the  
network.  
Select “MIU” from the main menu to access the following  
functions.  
ꢀ2+%674'  
ꢀ+/#)'  
ꢀ+0276  
.+8'ꢀ/1&'  
2%ꢃ.'55ꢀ24'5'06#6+10  
5'672  
Gꢃ5*16  
+0(14/#6+10  
5'48+%'  
ꢀ5'672  
ꢀ#7&+1  
ꢀ5%4''0  
ꢀ126+10  
ꢀ/+7  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07  
Select an item using the ▲/▼ cursor buttons on the  
projector or remote control, and press the ► cursor button  
on the projector or remote control, or ENTER button on  
the remote control to execute the item. Then perform it  
according to the following table.  
See the User’s Manual - Network Functions for details of  
MIU operation. Last section of this manual.  
NOTE • The factory default setting for DHCP is TURN OFF. If your network  
has DHCP enabled, and needs to set IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and  
DEFAULT GATEWAY automatically, please set DHCP to TURN ON. ( 2.5.2  
Network Settings of the User’s Manual - Network Functions)  
• If you are not utilizing SNTP ( 2.5.7 Date/Time Settings of the User’s  
Manual - Network Functions), then you must set the DATE AND TIME ( 56)  
during the initial installation.  
Item  
Description  
Selecting this item sets the projector onto the “Live Mode”.  
On the “Live Mode”, the projector displays the images from the PC  
LIVE MODE  
via Network, supported by “MIU Live Viewer”. (  
1.1 Live Mode of  
the User’s Manual - Network Functions, last section of this manual).  
Selecting this item displays the PC-LESS PRESENTATION menu.  
2%ꢀ.'55ꢁ24'5'06#6+10  
ꢁ6*7/$0#+.  
ꢁ5.+&'ꢁ5*19  
ꢁ&+4'%64;  
ꢁ&+52.#;ꢁ5+<'  
ꢁ-';ꢁ%10(+)ꢂ  
Using the menu is able to make the projector  
display the images stored in SD card or USB  
PC-LESS  
PRESENTATION memory, and realizes a presentation without PC.  
1.2 PC-LESS Presentation of the User’s  
(
Manual - Network Functions)  
(continued on next page)  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIU Menu  
MIU Menu (continued)  
Item  
Operation  
Selecting this item displays the e-SHOT menu.  
Gꢀ5*16ꢁ  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item which  
+/#)'ꢄꢁ &'/10564#6+10ꢀꢃꢄ  
+/#)'ꢂꢁ 24'5'06#6+10(+.'  
is a still image by the e-SHOT ( 4.7 e-SHOT  
&'/10564#6+10ꢀꢃꢅ  
6#$.'  
+/#)'ꢅꢁ  
+/#)'ꢆꢁ  
(Still Image Transfer) Display of the User’s  
Manual - Network Functions) and the ► or  
ENTER button to display the image.  
• Insert the SD memory card or USB memory into the projector  
before you use the e-SHOT function. ( 12)  
• The item without image stored cannot be selected.  
• The image names are each displayed in ꢀ6 characters or less.  
Japanese file name is displayed correctly only when the projector’s  
language is set to Japanese. And the characters other than alphanumeric  
character are not displayed correctly in Japanese mode. (Ç, ä, etc.)  
To switch the image displayed  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons.  
e-SHOT  
To return to the menu  
Press the ◄ or ESC button on the remote control.  
To erase the image displayed and its source file in the SD card  
or USB memory  
(ꢀ) Press the RESET button on the  
remote control while displaying  
an image to display the e-SHOT -  
RESET menu.  
ꢀG5*16ꢀ  
ꢀꢀ4'5'6ꢀꢀꢀ+/#)'ꢃꢀ  
ꢅꢀ01ꢀꢀꢀꢄꢀꢀ;'5ꢀ  
'5%ꢀ '06'4ꢀ  
(ꢁ) Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the INPUT  
button on the projector to perform to erase.  
To stop erasing, press the ◄ button and INPUT button on the  
projector.  
ꢀ/+7ꢀ5'672  
Selecting this item displays the MIU SETUP menu.  
ꢀ&*%2ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ10  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item, and the ►  
ꢀ+2ꢀ#&&4'55  
ꢀ57$0'6ꢀ/#5-  
or ENTER button on the remote control to perform  
ꢀ&'(#7.6ꢀ)#6'9#;  
the item.  
ꢀ6+/'ꢀ&+(('4'0%'  
ꢀ&#6'ꢀ#0&ꢀ6+/'  
ꢀ/1&'  
ꢀ%*  
SETUP  
ꢀ'0%4;26+10  
ꢀ52''&  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)  
ꢀ0'6914-ꢀ/1&'  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to turn DHCP on/off.  
TURN ON  
TURN OFF  
ó
&*%2ꢀ  
6740ꢀ10ꢀ  
6740ꢀ1((ꢀ  
• Select TURN OFF when the network does not have  
DHCP enabled.  
(continued on next page)  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIU Menu  
MIU Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
IP ADDRESS  
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the IP  
ADDRESS. This function can only be used  
when DHCP is set to TURN OFF.  
ꢀꢁꢂꢅꢆꢄꢃꢀꢄꢃ ꢂꢇꢈ  
+2ꢃ#&&4'55ꢃ  
• The IP ADDRESS is the number that identifies this projector on the  
network. You cannot have two devices with the same IP ADDRESS  
on the same network.  
SUBNET MASK  
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the  
same SUBNET MASK used by your PC. This  
function can only be used when DHCP is set  
255. 255.255. 0  
SUBNET MASK  
to TURN OFF.  
DEFAULT GATEWAY  
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the  
0. 0. 0.  
0
DEFAULT GATEWAY (a node on a computer  
network that serves as an access point to  
another network) address.  
DEFAULT GATEWAY  
SETUP  
(continued)  
This function can only be used when DHCP is  
set to TURN OFF.  
TIME DIFFERENCE  
6+/'ꢀ&+(('4'0%'ꢀ  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to enter the  
TIME DIFFERENCE.  
Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE  
as the one set on your PC. If unsure,  
consult your network administrator.  
Use the ◄ button to return to the menu  
after setting the TIME DIFFERENCE.  
㪞㪤㪫㩷㪇㪇㪑㪇㪇  
DATE AND TIME  
Use the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons to enter the  
Year (last two digits), Month, Date, Hour and  
Minute.  
ꢀꢁꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢂꢃꢃꢄꢃꢃꢁꢃꢅꢃꢁ  
&#6'ꢃ#0&ꢃ6+/'  
• The projector will override this setting and  
retrieve DATE AND TIME information from the  
Timeserver when SNTP is enabled. ( 2.5.7  
Date/Time Settings of the User’s Manual -  
Network Functions)  
(continued on next page)  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIU Menu  
MIU Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
MODE  
/1&'  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the mode of  
the network communication system. Select it  
according to the setting of your PC.  
#&*1%  
+0(4#5647%674'  
ADHOC  
INFRASTRUCTURE  
ó
CH  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the channel  
of the wireless LAN while using it. Select it  
according to the setting of your PC.  
%*  
ꢀꢀ  
The channels ꢀ to ꢀꢀ are available.  
• The available channels would be various depending on a country.  
In addition, wireless LAN card might be required due to the  
standard.  
ENCRYPTION  
'0%4;26+10  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the encryption  
ꢀ92#ꢅꢁ25-ꢂ#'5ꢃ  
ꢀ92#ꢁ25-ꢂ#'5ꢃ  
method to be used.  
92#ꢁ25-ꢂ6-+2ꢃ  
9'2ꢀꢄꢅꢆꢀDKV  
9'2ꢀꢀꢇꢈꢀDKV  
1((  
WPAꢁ-PSK(AES)  
SETUP  
(continued)  
ô
WPA-PSK(AES)  
WPA-PSK(TKIP)  
WEP ꢀꢁ8bit  
WEP 64bit  
OFF  
ó
ó
ó
ó
SPEED  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the transfer rate.  
52''&  
#761  
ꢀꢁꢂ/  
ꢁꢇꢂ/  
ꢄꢅꢂ/  
ꢃꢁꢂ/  
ꢆꢇꢂ/  
ꢆꢃꢂ/  
ꢆꢆꢂ/  
ꢂꢈꢂ/  
ꢂꢅꢂ/  
ꢀꢉꢀ/  
ꢂꢃꢂ/  
ꢂꢆꢂ/  
(M : Mbps : Megabits per second)  
AUTO 54M 48M 36M ꢁ4M ꢀ8M  
ó ó ó ó ó  
ô
ô
ꢀM ꢁM 5.5M 6M 9M ꢀꢀM ꢀꢁM  
ó ó ó ó ó ó  
• The AUTO mode automatically selects the  
optimum rate.  
• Transfer rates may change due to the network  
situation.  
0'6914-ꢀ/1&'  
NETWORK MODE  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select the network mode.  
9+4'.'55  
9+4'&  
WIRELESS  
WIRED  
ó
• The network mode will be initialized whenever the power is turned  
on with the power switch.  
• The WIRELESS will be enabled when the wireless network card is  
installed.  
• The WIRED will be enabled when the wireless network card is not  
installed.  
(continued on next page)  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIU Menu  
MIU Menu (continued)  
Item  
Description  
Selecting this item displays the MIU-INFORMATION dialog for confirming  
the network setting.  
/+7ꢊ+0(14/#6+10  
0#/'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢅꢀꢅꢅ  
+2ꢀ#&&4'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢄꢂꢅꢁꢆꢃꢅꢁꢅꢂꢇꢈ  
57$0'6/#5-ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢇꢇꢅꢂꢇꢇꢅꢂꢇꢇꢅꢉ  
&'(#7.6ꢀ)#6'9#;ꢀꢀꢉꢅꢉꢅꢉꢅꢉ  
6+/'ꢀ&+(('4'0%'ꢀꢀ)/6ꢀꢉꢉꢍꢉꢉ  
&#6'ꢀ#0&ꢀ6+/'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢂꢉꢉꢉꢌꢁꢌꢁꢀꢀꢉꢍꢉ  
/1&'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ#&*1%  
0'6914-ꢀ/1&'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ9+4'.'55  
12'4#6+10ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ.+8'  
75$ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ/'/14;  
5&ꢀ%#4&ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ9+4'.'55ꢀ.#0  
52''&ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢁꢀ/  
55+&ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋꢋ  
/#%ꢀ'6*'40'6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋ  
/#%ꢀ9+4'.'55ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋꢊꢋꢋ  
%*ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁꢁ  
'0%4;26+10ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ9'2ꢀꢁꢂꢃꢀDKV  
INFORMATION  
• Only the first ꢀ6 characters of the projector name are displayed.  
• Only the first 3ꢁ characters of the SSID are displayed.  
• When the voltage level of the battery for the built in clock decreases, the  
set time may become incorrect even though accurate date and time are  
input. Replace the battery suitably. ( 63)  
• MAC wireless will not be displayed when the NETWORK MODE is set to  
the WIRED even if the wireless LAN SD card is mounted.  
• IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate “0.0.0.0”  
in the following condition.  
(ꢀ) The NETWORK MODE is set to the WIRELESSE and the wireless LAN  
SD card is not mounted.  
(ꢁ) DHCP is ON and the projector does not get address from DHCP server.  
Selecting this item displays the SERVICE menu.  
Use the ▲/▼ buttons to select an item, and the ► or  
ENTER button on the remote control to perform the  
item.  
SERVICE  
REMOVE ALL  
REMOVE SD CARD  
REMOVE USB  
MIU RESTART  
REMOVE ALL, REMOVE SD CARD, REMOVE USB  
Use the ▲ button to perform the procedure to remove  
the media.  
4'/18'ꢀ#..  
':'%76'  
%#0%'.  
EXECUTE CANCEL  
• Before removing the SD card or USB memory, be sure  
to perform the REMOVE procedure.  
MIU RESTART  
SERVICE  
MIU RESTART  
Use the ▲ button to restart the network communication.  
The network communication will be cut off once and  
restarted.  
EXECUTE  
CANCEL  
EXECUTE CANCEL  
• After selecting the EXECUTE, the MIU menu may not be controlled  
approximately ꢁ0 seconds.  
• If DHCP is ON, IP address may be changed.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Maintenance  
Lamp  
A lamp has finite product life. Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause  
the pictures darker or the color tone poor. Note that each lamp has a different  
lifetime, and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them.  
Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended. To prepare  
a new lamp, contact your dealer and tell the lamp type number.  
Type number = 456-8943  
The lamp cover  
Replacing the lamp  
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord.  
Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes.  
ꢀ.  
Prepare a new lamp.  
If the projector is mounted on a ceiling, or if the lamp  
has broken, also ask the dealer to replace the lamp.  
ꢁ.  
In case of replacement by yourself,  
Loosen the screw (marked by arrow) of the lamp cover  
and then slide the lamp cover to the side to remove it.  
3.  
4.  
Loosen the 3 screws (marked by arrow) of the  
lamp, and slowly pick up the lamp by the handles.  
Insert the new lamp, and retighten firmly the  
5.  
3 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the  
previous process to lock it in place.  
Slide the lamp cover back in place and firmly  
fasten the screw of the lamp cover.  
The handles  
6.  
Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time  
using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu  
7.  
(
44)  
.
(ꢀ) Press the MENU button to display a menu.  
(ꢁ) Point at the “Go to Advanced Menu …” in the menu  
using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button.  
(3) Point at the “OPTION” in the left column of the  
menu using the ▼/▲button, then press the ►  
button.  
(4) Point at the “LAMP TIME” using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A  
dialog will appear.  
(5) Press the ▲ button to select “RESET” on the dialog. It performs resetting the  
lamp time.  
NOTE • Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp,  
for a suitable indication about the lamp.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Lamp (continued)  
Lamp warning  
HIGH VOLTAGE  
HIGH TEMPERATURE  
HIGH PRESSURE  
WARNING ►The projector uses a high-pressure mercury glass lamp. The  
lamp can break with a loud bang, or burn out, if jolted or scratched, handled  
while hot, or worn over time. Note that each lamp has a different lifetime, and  
some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them. In addition, when  
the bulb bursts, it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing, and  
for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector’s vent holes.  
About disposal of a lamp: This product contains a mercury lamp; do not put  
it in a trash. Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws.  
• For lamp recycling, go to www.lamprecycle.org. (in the US)  
• For product disposal, contact your local government agency  
or www.eiae.org (in the US) or www.epsc.ca (in Canada).  
For more information, call your dealer.  
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),  
unplug the power cord from the outlet, and make sure to request a  
replacement lamp from your local dealer. Note that shards of glass  
could damage the projector’s internals, or cause injury during handling,  
so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself.  
• If the lamp should break (it will make a loud bang when it does),  
Disconnect  
the plug  
from the  
power  
ventilate the room well, and make sure not to breathe the gas that  
comes out of the projector vents, or get it in your eyes or mouth.  
• Before replacing the lamp, turn the projector off and unplug the power  
outlet  
cord, then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently.  
Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns, as well as damaging the  
lamp.  
• Never unscrew except the appointed (marked by an arrow) screws.  
• Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from  
above. This is dangerous, since if the lamp’s bulb has broken, the  
shards will fall out when the cover is opened. In addition, working in  
high places is dangerous, so ask your local dealer to have the lamp  
replaced even if the bulb is not broken.  
• Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed. At the lamp  
replacing, make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly. Loose  
screws could result in damage or injury.  
Use only the lamp of the specified type.  
• If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used, it is possible  
that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp. If this  
happens, contact your local dealer or a service representative.  
Handle with care: jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use.  
• Using the lamp for long periods of time, could cause it dark, not to light  
up or to burst. When the pictures appear dark, or when the color tone  
is poor, please replace the lamp as soon as possible. Do not use old  
(used) lamps; this is a cause of breakage.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Air filter  
Please check and clean the air filter periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged  
by dust or the like, internal temperatures rise, which could cause a fire, a burn or  
malfunction to the projector. When the indicators or a message prompts you to  
clean the air filter, comply with it as soon as possible. Note that the projector may  
shut down, when the projector heats too much.  
Please replace the air filter when it is damaged or too soiled. Preparation of a new  
air filter is recommended. To prepare a new air filter, contact with your dealer and  
tell the air filter type number.  
Type number = MU03642  
Cleaning the air filter  
The front side of the projector  
Turn the projector off, and unplug the  
power cord. Allow the projector to  
sufficiently cool down.  
ꢀ.  
The filter cover  
Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the  
filter cover.  
ꢁ.  
Hold the filter cover knobs while lifting it.  
The filter unit made up the filter cover and  
others will come off.  
3.  
The filter cover knobs  
The filter frame knob  
Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of  
the projector and the filter frame side of  
the filter unit.  
The filter unit  
4.  
If the air filter is damaged or too soiled,  
replace it according to the following  
procedure number 5 to 7. Otherwise, please  
jump to the procedure number 8.  
The filter frame  
To remove the filter frame, hold the filter  
cover while holding and pulling the filter  
frame’s knob by another hand.  
5.  
The air filter  
Replace the air filter with new one. It is  
recommended that the fluted surface of  
the air filter faces the filter cover.  
6.  
7. Put the filter frame back.  
The fluted  
surface of  
the air filter  
8. Put the filter unit back into the projector.  
The filter cover  
(continued on next page)  
6ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Air filter (continued)  
Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in  
9.  
(
26)  
.
the EASY MENU  
(ꢀ) Press the MENU button to display a menu.  
(2) Point at the “FILTER TIME” using the ▼/▲ button, then press the ► button. A  
dialog will appear.  
(3) Press the ▲ button to select “RESET” on the dialog. It performs resetting the  
filter time.  
WARNING ►Before taking care of the air filter, make sure the power  
switch is off and the power cable is not plugged in, then allow the projector to  
cool sufficiently. Taking care of the air filter in a high temperature state of the  
projector could cause an electric shock, a burn or malfunction to the projector.  
►Use only the air filter of the specified type. Do not use the projector without  
the air filter or the filter cover. It could result in a fire or malfunction to the  
projector.  
►Clean the air filter periodically. If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the  
like, internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire, a burn or malfunction to  
the projector.  
NOTE • Please replace the air filter when it is damaged or too soiled, and  
also when you replace the lamp.  
• When you replace the projection lamp, please replace the air filter. An air filter  
of specified type will come together with a replacement lamp for this projector.  
• Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air  
filter, for a suitable indication about the air filter.  
• The projector may display the message such as “CHECK THE AIR FLOW” or  
turn off the projector, to prevent the internal heat level rising.  
6ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Internal clock battery  
Consumption of the battery makes the clock not to work correctly. When the clock is wrong or it has  
stopped, please replace the battery according to the following procedures.  
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the  
ꢀ.  
ꢁ.  
3.  
projector to cool sufficiently.  
After making sure that the projector has cooled adequately,  
slowly turn over the projector, so that the bottom is facing.  
Battery Cover  
Remove the battery cover.  
Turn the battery cover in the direction indicated “OPEN”  
using such as coins. Then the battery cover will come up. While  
removing the battery cover, pick its knob.  
OPEN  
Take the old battery out.  
Press the metal claw of the battery holder. Then the battery  
will come up. Remove the battery.  
4.  
Knob  
Metal claw  
Put a new battery in.  
5.  
Replace battery with HITACHI MAXELL, Part No.CR2032  
only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or  
explosion.  
“+” marking  
Insert a new battery in the battery holder according to its minus terminal  
as indicated in the battery holder, so that the side marked by  
facing. And push the battery into the battery holder fully to fix.  
+
is  
CLOSE  
Close the battery cover.  
6.  
Replace the battery cover in place, then turn it in the  
direction indicated “CLOSE” using such as coins, to fix.  
WARNING Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed. Battery  
may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire.  
And also improper use may result in cracking or leakage, which could result in fire, injury and/or  
pollution of the surrounding environment.  
Be sure to use only the batteries specified. Do not use batteries of different types at the same  
time. Do not mix a new battery with used one.  
Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery.  
If the battery is placed in the battery holder upside-down, it may be hard to remove.  
Keep a battery away from children and pets. If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment.  
Do not short circuit or solder a battery.  
Do not allow a battery in a fire or water. Keep batteries in a dark, cool and dry place.  
If you observe a leakage of a battery, wipe out the flower and then replace a battery. If the liquid  
adheres to your body or clothes, rinse well with water immediately.  
Obey the local laws on disposing the battery.  
NOTE If the battery is placed in the battery holder upside-down, follow the procedure below  
to remove and reload it properly.  
ꢀ. Remove the battery cover as described in steps ꢀ through 3 above.  
ꢁ. Turn the projector over again, so that the top of the projector is facing up.  
3. While lifting the side of the projector closest to the lens, press the metal claw of the battery  
holder. The battery will fall out of the holder, so be careful not to lose it.  
4. Turn the projector over once more, so that the bottom faces up, and reload the battery correctly.  
The internal clock’s time will be reset when the battery is removed.  
Please reconfigure the time via the menu or a web browser after replacing the battery.  
(
2.5.7 Date/Time Settings of the - Network Functions Section)  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Other care  
Inside of the projector  
In order to ensure the safe use of your projector, please have it cleaned and  
inspected by your dealer about once every year.  
Caring for the lens  
If the lens is flawed, soiled or fogged, it could cause deterioration of display  
quality. Please take care of the lens, being cautious of handling.  
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool  
sufficiently.  
ꢀ.  
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe the lens  
with a commercially available lens-cleaning wipe. Do not touch the lens  
directly with your hand.  
ꢁ.  
Caring for the cabinet and remote control  
Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration, peeling paint,  
etc.  
Turn the projector off, and unplug the power cord. Allow the projector to cool  
sufficiently.  
ꢀ.  
After making sure that the projector is cool adequately, lightly wipe with gauze  
or a soft cloth.  
If the projector is extremely dirty, dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner  
diluted in water, and wipe lightly after wringing well. Then, wipe lightly with a  
soft, dry cloth.  
ꢁ.  
WARNING ►Before caring, make sure the power switch is off and the  
power cable is not plugged in, and then allow the projector to cool sufficiently.  
The care in a high temperature state of the projector could cause a burn and/or  
malfunction to the projector.  
►Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally. Doing is so  
dangerous.  
►Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector. It could result  
in a fire, an electric shock, and/or malfunction to the projector.  
• Do not put anything containing water, cleaners or chemicals near the  
projector.  
• Do not use aerosols or sprays.  
CAUTION ►Please take right care of the projector according to the  
following. Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse influence  
such as discoloration, peeling paint, etc.  
►Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual.  
►Do not polish or wipe with hard objects.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Related messages  
When the unit's power is on, messages such as those shown below may be  
displayed. When any such message is displayed on the screen, please follow the  
instructions described below. If the same message is displayed after the remedy,  
or if a message other than the following appears, please contact your dealer or  
service company.  
Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several  
minutes, it will be reappeared every time the power is turned on.  
Message  
Description  
There is no input signal.  
Please confirm the signal input connection, and the status  
NO INPUT IS DETECTED  
  
of the signal source.  
The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal  
is not within the specified range.  
SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE  
  
Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal  
fH kHz fV Hz  
source specs.  
The internal temperature is rising.  
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool  
down at least 20 minutes. After having confirmed the  
following items, please turn the power ON again.  
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?  
Is the air filter dirty?  
CHECK THE AIR FLOW  
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?  
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy, please set  
FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH.  
REMINDER  
*** HRS PASSED AFTER THE  
LAST FILTER CHECK.  
A note of precaution when cleaning the air filter.  
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or change  
the air filter referring to the “Air Filter” section of this manual  
FILTER MAINTENANCE IS ESSENTIAL  
TO REMOVE WARNING MESSAGE,  
RESET FILTER TIMER.  
(
61). After you have cleaned or changed the air filter,  
please be sure to reset the filter timer ( 26, 62).  
SEE MANUAL FURTHER INFO.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Regarding the indicator lamps  
Lighting and flashing of the POWER indicator, the LAMP indicator, and the TEMP  
indicator have the meanings as described in the table below. Please follow the  
instructions within the table. If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,  
or if an indication other than the following is displayed, please contact your dealer  
or service company.  
POWER  
indicator indicator indicator  
LAMP  
TEMP  
Description  
Lighting  
In Orange  
Turned  
off  
Turned  
off  
The projector is in a standby state.  
Please refer to the section “Power On/Off”.  
Blinking  
In Green  
Turned  
off  
Turned  
off  
The projector is warming up.  
Please wait.  
Lighting  
In Green  
Turned  
off  
Turned  
off  
The projector is in an on state.  
Ordinary operations may be performed.  
Blinking  
In Orange  
Turned  
off  
Turned  
off  
The projector is cooling down.  
Please wait.  
The projector is cooling down. A certain error  
has been detected.  
Please wait until the POWER indicator finishes  
blinking, and then perform the proper measure using  
the item descriptions below.  
Blinking  
In Red  
(discre- (discre-  
tionary) tionary)  
The lamp does not light, and there is a  
possibility that interior portion has become  
heated.  
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to  
cool down at least ꢁ0 minutes. After the projector has  
Lighting Turned sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of  
Blinking  
In Red  
or  
Lighting  
In Red  
In Red  
off  
the following items, and then turn the power on again.  
• Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?  
• Is the air filter dirty?  
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?  
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,  
please change the lamp referring to the section “Lamp”.  
The lamp cover has not been properly fixed.  
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to  
cool down at least 45 minutes. After the projector has  
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation  
of the attachment state of the lamp cover. After  
performing any needed maintenance, turn the power  
on again. If the same indication is displayed after  
the remedy, please contact your dealer or service  
company.  
Blinking  
In Red  
or  
Lighting  
In Red  
Blinking Turned  
In Red off  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Regarding the indicator lamps (continued)  
POWER  
indicator indicator indicator  
LAMP  
TEMP  
Description  
The cooling fan is not operating.  
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to  
cool down at least ꢁ0 minutes. After the projector has  
Turned Blinking sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation  
Blinking  
In Red  
or  
Lighting  
In Red  
off  
In Red that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan,  
etc., and then turn the power on again.  
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,  
please contact your dealer or service company.  
There is a possibility that the interior portion  
has become heated.  
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to  
cool down at least ꢁ0 minutes. After the projector has  
sufficiently cooled down, please make confirmation of  
Blinking  
In Red  
or  
Lighting  
In Red  
Turned Lighting the following items, and then turn the power on again.  
off  
In Red • Is there blockage of the air passage aperture?  
• Is the air filter dirty?  
• Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35°C?  
If the same indication is displayed after the remedy,  
please set FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the  
OPTION menu to HIGH.  
It is time to clean the air filter.  
Please immediately turn the power off, and clean or  
Lighting  
In Green  
Simultaneous  
blinking in Red  
change the air filter referring to the section “Air Filter”.  
After cleaning or changing the air filter, please be sure  
to reset the filter timer. After the remedy, reset the  
power to ON.  
There is a possibility that the interior portion  
has become overcooled.  
Please use the unit within the usage temperature  
parameters (5°C to 35°C). After the treatment, reset  
the power to ON.  
Lighting  
In Green  
Alternative  
blinking in Red  
Blinking in  
Green for Turned  
approx. 3  
seconds  
At least 1 “Power ON” schedule is saved to the  
projector.  
(Please refer to the User’s Manual-Network Functions:  
Schedule Settings for more information.)  
Turned  
off  
off  
NOTE • When the interior portion has become overheated, for safety  
purposes, the power source is automatically turned off, and the indicator lamps  
may also be turned off. In such a case, press the “” (OFF) side of the power  
switch, and wait at least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled  
down, please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp  
cover, and then turn the power on again.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects  
WARNING Never use the projector if abnormal operations such as  
smoke, strange odor, excessive sound, damaged casing or elements or cables,  
penetration of liquids or foreign matter, etc. should occur. In such cases,  
immediately turn off the power switch and then disconnect the power plug from  
the power outlet. After making sure that the smoke or odor has stopped, contact  
your dealer or service company.  
Before requesting repair, please check in accordance  
ꢀ.  
with the following chart. This operation sometimes  
resolves your problem.  
If the situation cannot be corrected,  
The projector’s microprocessor may need to be reset.  
ꢁ.  
Please push the Shutdown switch by using a pin or  
similar and the projector will be turned off immediately.  
Before turning it again, wait at least ꢀ0 minutes to make the projector cool down enough.  
Some setting may be wrong. Please use the FACTORY RESET function of the  
3.  
(
47)  
to reset all settings to factory default.  
SERVICE item in the OPTION menu  
Then, if the problem is not removed after the remedy, please contact your dealer  
or service company.  
Reference  
page  
Phenomenon  
Cases not involving a machine defect  
The electrical power cord is not plugged in.  
Correctly connect the power cord.  
ꢀ3  
The power switch is not set to the on position.  
Set the power switch to [ | ] (On).  
ꢀ7  
ꢀ7  
The main power source has been interrupted during  
operation such as by a power outage (blackout), etc.  
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool  
down at least ꢁ minutes, then turn the power on again.  
Power does not  
come on.  
Either there is no lamp and/or lamp cover, or either  
of these has not been properly fixed.  
Please turn the power off, and allow the projector to cool down  
at least 45 minutes. After the projector has sufficiently cooled  
down, please make confirmation of the attachment state of the  
lamp and lamp cover, and then turn the power on again.  
59  
The signal cables are not correctly connected.  
Correctly connect the connection cables.  
ꢀ0  
Signal source does not correctly work.  
Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to the  
manual of the source device.  
Neither sounds  
nor pictures are  
outputted.  
The input changeover settings are mismatched.  
Select the input signal, and correct the settings.  
ꢀ8, ꢀ9  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)  
Reference  
Phenomenon  
Cases not involving a machine defect  
page  
The signal cables are not correctly connected.  
Correctly connect the audio cables.  
ꢀ0  
The MUTE function is working.  
Restore the sound pressing the MUTE or VOLUME button  
on the remote control.  
ꢀ8  
ꢀ8  
Sound does not  
come out.  
The volume is adjusted to an extremely low level.  
Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu function  
or the remote control.  
The AUDIO setting is not correct.  
Correctly set the items in the AUDIO menu.  
38  
3, ꢀ7  
ꢀ0  
The lens cover is attached.  
Remove the lens cover.  
The signal cables are not correctly connected.  
Correctly connect the connection cables.  
The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level.  
Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu  
function or the remote control.  
ꢁ6, ꢁ7  
ꢀꢀ  
No pictures are  
displayed.  
The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug  
and play monitor.  
Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play  
monitor using another plug and play monitor.  
The BLANK screen is displayed.  
Press the BLANK button on the remote control.  
ꢁ3  
ꢁꢁ  
The FREEZE function is working.  
Press the FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal.  
Video screen  
display freezes.  
Color settings are not correctly adjusted.  
Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR  
TEMP, COLOR, TINT and/or COLOR SPACE settings,  
using the menu functions.  
ꢁ6, ꢁ8,  
3ꢁ  
Colors have a  
faded- out  
appearance, or  
Color tone is  
poor.  
COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable.  
Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO, RGB,  
SMPTEꢁ40, REC709 or REC60ꢀ.  
3ꢁ  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects (continued)  
Reference  
page  
Phenomenon  
Cases not involving a machine defect  
The brightness and/or contrast are adjusted to an  
extremely low level.  
Adjust BRIGHTNESS and/or CONTRAST settings to a  
higher level using the menu function.  
ꢁ6, ꢁ7  
The WHISPER function is working.  
Select NORMAL for the WHISPER item in the SETUP  
menu.  
Pictures appear  
dark.  
ꢁ6, 37  
59, 60  
The lamp is approaching the end of its product  
lifetime.  
Replace the lamp.  
Either the focus and/or horizontal phase settings are  
not properly adjusted.  
Adjust the focus using the focus ring, and/or H PHASE  
using the menu function.  
ꢁ0, 3ꢀ  
Pictures appear  
blurry.  
The lens is dirty or misty.  
Clean the lens referring to the section “Caring for the lens”.  
64  
4
The exhaust ventilation holes at front is blocked by  
some objects.  
Pictures are  
trembling.  
Remove any objects from front side of the projector.  
NOTE • Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen, this  
is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and it does not constitute or  
imply a machine defect.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warranty And After-Service / Specification  
Warranty and after-service  
If a problem occurs with the equipment, first refer to the “Troubleshooting” and run  
through the suggested checks. If this does not resolve the problem, please contact your  
dealer or service company. They will tell you what warranty condition is applied.  
Specification  
Item  
Specification  
Product name  
Liquid crystal projector  
ꢁ.0 cm (0.79 type)  
Panel size  
Liquid  
Crystal Drive system TFT active matrix  
Panel  
Pixels  
786,43ꢁ pixels (ꢀ0ꢁ4 horizontal x 768 vertical)  
Zoom lens F=ꢀ.7 ~ ꢁ.ꢀ f=ꢁ4 ~ ꢁ9 mm  
ꢁ85W UHB  
Lens  
Lamp  
Speaker  
4W x 4  
Power supply  
AC ꢀ00-ꢀꢁ0V/5.0A, ACꢁꢁ0-ꢁ40V/ꢁ.ꢀA  
460W  
Power consumption  
Temperature range  
5 ~ 35°C (Operating)  
4ꢀ8 (W) x ꢀ39 (H) x 3ꢀ9 (D) mm  
(Not including protruding parts)  
* Please refer to the following figure.  
Size  
Weight (mass)  
7.ꢀ kg  
RGB input port  
Audio input port  
RGBꢀ.......D-sub ꢀ5pin mini xꢀ AUDIO INꢀ .......Stereo mini xꢀ  
RGBꢁ.......D-sub ꢀ5pin mini xꢀ AUDIO INꢁ .......Stereo mini xꢀ  
AUDIO IN3 ................. RCA xꢁ  
AUDIO IN4 ................. RCA xꢁ  
RGB output port  
RGB OUT..D-sub ꢀ5pin mini xꢀ  
Communication port  
Digital input port  
CONTROL.......... D-sub 9pin xꢀ  
Mꢀ-D..........................Mꢀ-D xꢀ  
Ports  
Other ports  
LAN ...............................RJ45 xꢀ  
Video input port  
Y, CB/PB, CR/PR .......... RCA x3  
AUX I/O .................... USB(A) xꢀ  
S-VIDEO ................S-video xꢀ  
SD card slot ........................... xꢀ  
VIDEO .......................Video xꢀ  
REMOTE CONTROL  
.........................Stereo mini xꢀ  
Lamp  
456-8943  
Optional  
Air filter  
parts  
MU0364ꢁ  
Others  
* Please consult your dealer.  
NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.  
7ꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Specifications (continued)  
4ꢀ8  
[unit: mm]  
7ꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P8r9oje4c4tor  
User's Manual  
Technical  
Example of computer signal  
Resolution (H x V) H. frequency (kHz) V. frequency (Hz)  
Rating  
Signal mode  
720 x 400  
640 x 480  
640 x 480  
640 x 480  
640 x 480  
800 x 600  
800 x 600  
800 x 600  
800 x 600  
800 x 600  
832 x 624  
ꢀ024 x 768  
ꢀ024 x 768  
ꢀ024 x 768  
ꢀ024 x 768  
ꢀꢀ52 x 864  
ꢀ280 x 960  
ꢀ280 x ꢀ024  
ꢀ280 x ꢀ024  
ꢀ280 x ꢀ024  
ꢀ600 x ꢀ200  
ꢀ280 x 768  
ꢀ400 x ꢀ050  
37.9  
3ꢀ.5  
37.9  
37.5  
43.3  
35.2  
37.9  
48.ꢀ  
46.9  
53.7  
49.7  
48.4  
56.5  
60.0  
68.7  
67.5  
60.0  
64.0  
80.0  
9ꢀ.ꢀ  
75.0  
47.7  
65.2  
85.0  
59.9  
72.8  
75.0  
85.0  
56.3  
60.3  
72.2  
75.0  
85.ꢀ  
74.5  
60.0  
70.ꢀ  
75.0  
85.0  
75.0  
60.0  
60.0  
75.0  
85.0  
60.0  
60.0  
60.0  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
TEXT  
VGA (60Hz)  
VGA (72Hz)  
VGA (75Hz)  
VGA (85Hz)  
SVGA (56Hz)  
SVGA (60Hz)  
SVGA (72Hz)  
SVGA (75Hz)  
SVGA (85Hz)  
Mac ꢀ6” mode  
XGA (60Hz)  
XGA (70Hz)  
XGA (75Hz)  
XGA (85Hz)  
ꢀꢀ52 x 864 (75Hz)  
ꢀ280 x 960 (60Hz)  
SXGA (60Hz)  
SXGA (75Hz)  
SXGA (85Hz)  
UXGA (60Hz)  
W-XGA (60Hz)  
SXGA+ (60Hz)  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
VESA  
NOTE • Be sure to check jack type, signal level, timing and resolution  
before connecting this projector to a computer.  
• Some computers may have multiple display screen modes. Use of some of  
these modes will not be possible with this projector.  
• Depending on the input signal, full-size display may not be possible in some  
cases. Refer to the number of display pixels above.  
• Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA  
(ꢀ600xꢀ200), the signal will be converted to the projector’s panel resolution  
before being displayed. The best display performance will be achieved if the  
resolutions of the input signal and projector panel are identical.  
• Automatically adjustment may not function correctly with some input signals.  
• The image may not be displayed correctly when the input sync signal is a  
composite sync or a sync on G.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial set signals  
Initial set signals  
The following signals are used for the initial settings. The signal timing of some  
computer models may be different. In such case, adjust the items V POSITION  
and H POSITION in the IMAGE menu.  
Back porch (B)  
Front porch (D)  
Back porch (b)  
Front porch (d)  
Display interval (C)  
Display interval (c)  
Data  
Data  
V. Sync.  
H. Sync.  
Sync (A)  
Sync (a)  
Horizontal signal timing (μs)  
Vertical signal timing (lines)  
Computer/  
Computer/  
Signal  
Signal  
(A)  
2.0  
3.8  
ꢀ.3  
2.0  
ꢀ.6  
(B)  
(C)  
(D)  
(a)  
3
2
3
3
3
2
4
6
3
3
3
6
6
3
3
(b)  
42  
33  
28  
ꢀ6  
25  
22  
23  
23  
2ꢀ  
27  
39  
29  
29  
28  
36  
(c)  
(d)  
ꢀ0  
9
37  
TEXT  
3.0 20.3 ꢀ.0  
ꢀ.9 25.4 0.6  
4.ꢀ 20.3 0.8  
3.8 20.3 0.5  
2.2 ꢀ7.8 ꢀ.6  
3.6 22.2 0.7  
2.2 20.0 ꢀ.0  
ꢀ.3 ꢀ6.0 ꢀ.ꢀ  
3.2 ꢀ6.2 0.3  
2.7 ꢀ4.2 0.6  
3.9 ꢀ4.5 0.6  
2.5 ꢀ5.8 0.4  
ꢀ.9 ꢀ3.7 0.3  
2.2 ꢀ3.0 0.2  
2.2 ꢀ0.8 0.5  
TEXT  
400  
480  
480  
480  
480  
600  
600  
600  
600  
600  
624  
768  
768  
768  
768  
VGA (60Hz)  
VGA (72Hz)  
VGA (75Hz)  
VGA (85Hz)  
VGA (60Hz)  
VGA (72Hz)  
VGA (75Hz)  
VGA (85Hz)  
SVGA (56Hz)  
SVGA (60Hz)  
SVGA (72Hz)  
SVGA (75Hz)  
SVGA (85Hz)  
Mac ꢀ6" mode  
XGA (60Hz)  
XGA (70Hz)  
XGA (75Hz)  
XGA (85Hz)  
SVGA (56Hz) 2.0  
SVGA (60Hz) 3.2  
SVGA (72Hz) 2.4  
SVGA (75Hz) ꢀ.6  
SVGA (85Hz) ꢀ.ꢀ  
Mac ꢀ6" mode ꢀ.ꢀ  
3
3
XGA (60Hz)  
XGA (70Hz)  
XGA (75Hz)  
XGA (85Hz)  
2.ꢀ  
ꢀ.8  
ꢀ.2  
ꢀ.0  
ꢀꢀ52 x 864  
(75Hz)  
ꢀ280 x 960  
(60Hz)  
ꢀꢀ52 x 864  
(75Hz)  
ꢀ280 x 960  
(60Hz)  
ꢀ.2  
ꢀ.0  
2.4 ꢀ0.7 0.6  
3
3
32  
36  
864  
960  
2.9  
ꢀꢀ.9  
0.9  
SXGA (60Hz) ꢀ.0  
SXGA (75Hz) ꢀ.ꢀ  
SXGA (85Hz) ꢀ.0  
UXGA (60Hz) ꢀ.2  
W-XGA (60Hz) ꢀ.7  
SXGA+ (60Hz) ꢀ.2  
2.3  
ꢀ.8  
ꢀ.4  
ꢀ.9  
ꢀꢀ.9  
9.5  
8.ꢀ  
9.9  
0.4  
0.ꢀ  
0.4  
0.4  
SXGA(60Hz)  
SXGA (75Hz)  
SXGA (85Hz)  
UXGA (60Hz)  
W-XGA (60Hz)  
SXGA+ (60Hz)  
3
3
3
3
3
3
38 ꢀ024  
38 ꢀ024  
44 ꢀ024  
46 ꢀ200  
2.5 ꢀ6.0 0.8  
2.0 ꢀꢀ.4 0.7  
23  
768  
33 ꢀ050  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection to the ports  
Connection to the ports  
C
A
B
LAN  
D
AUX I/
DC 5V 0.5A  
RGB  
OUT  
RGB1  
RGB2  
M1-D  
Y
CB/PB  
VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
CR/PR  
L
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
R
L
R
AUDIO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
3
AUDIO IN  
4
CONTROL  
A
B
C
RGB IN1, RGB IN2, RGB OUT  
D-sub ꢀ5pin mini shrink jack  
• Video signal: RGB separate, Analog, 0.7Vp-p,  
ꢀꢀ ꢀ2 ꢀ3 ꢀ4 ꢀ5  
75Ω terminated (positive)  
• H/V. sync. Signal: TTL level (positive/negative)  
• Composite sync. Signal: TTL level  
6
7
8
9
ꢀ0  
2
3
4
5
At RGB signal  
Pin  
Pin  
2
Signal  
Signal  
Video Red  
Video Green  
Video Blue  
9
(No connection)  
ꢀ0 Ground  
ꢀꢀ (No connection)  
3
4
A
B C  
(No connection)  
Ground  
Ground Red  
Ground Green  
Ground Blue  
ꢀ2  
: SDA (DDC data),  
/
: (No connection)  
: (No connection)  
5
6
7
ꢀ3 H. sync / Composite sync.  
ꢀ4 V. sync.  
A
B C  
/
ꢀ5  
: SCL (DDC clock),  
8
D
M1-D  
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2ꢀ  
20 ꢀ9 ꢀ8 ꢀ7 ꢀ6 ꢀ5 ꢀ4 ꢀ3 ꢀ2 ꢀꢀ  
• Type: T.M.D.S  
• Amplitude differential: DC ꢀ50-ꢀ200mV/AC ꢀ.56 Vp-p  
• Amplitude: TTL level (positive/negative)  
6
ꢀ0  
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
2
3
T.M.D.S. Data2 +  
T.M.D.S. Data2 -  
T.M.D.S. Data2 Return  
ꢀꢀ T.M.D.S. Dataꢀ +  
ꢀ2 T.M.D.S. Dataꢀ -  
ꢀ3 T.M.D.S. Dataꢀ Return  
2ꢀ T.M.D.S. Data0 +  
22 T.M.D.S. Data0 -  
23 T.M.D.S. Data0 Return  
4
T.M.D.S. Clock Return  
ꢀ4 T.M.D.S. Clock +  
24 USB +5V DC Input  
5
6
(No connection)  
V.Sync.  
ꢀ5 T.M.D.S. Clock -  
ꢀ6 USB Data +  
25 DDC & USB Return  
26 DDC Data (SDA)  
7
8
9
(No connection)  
ꢀ7 USB Data -  
27 DDC Clock (SCL)  
28 DDC +5V DC Input  
29 (No connection)  
30 (No connection)  
Hot Plug Detect (+5V DC Output)  
(No connection)  
ꢀ8 (No connection)  
ꢀ9 (No connection)  
20 (No connection)  
ꢀ0 (No connection)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection to the ports (continued)  
LAN  
AUX I/O  
DC 5V 0.5A  
I
E
F
G
RGB  
OUT  
1  
RGB2  
M1-D  
Y
CB/PB  
VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
CR/PR  
H
REMOTE  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
OUT  
CONTROL  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
3
AUDIO IN  
4
CONTROL  
E
F
G
COMPONENT VIDEO Y, CB/PB,  
CR/PR  
RCA jack x3  
• System: 525i(480i), 525p(480p), 625i(576i), 750p(720p), ꢀꢀ25i(ꢀ080i)  
Port  
Y
Signal  
Component video Y, 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator with composite  
B
CB/P Component video CB/PB, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator  
R
R
C /P Component video CR/PR, 0.7±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator  
H
S-VIDEO  
2
Mini DIN 4pin jack  
3
4
Pin  
Signal  
Color signal 0.286Vp-p (NTSC, burst), 75Ω terminator  
Color signal 0.300Vp-p (PAL/SECAM, burst) 75Ω terminator  
Brightness signal, 1.0Vp-p, 75Ω terminator  
Ground  
Ground  
2
3
4
I
VIDEO  
RCA jack  
• System: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, PAL-M, PAL-N, NTSC4.43  
• 1.0±0.1Vp-p, 75Ω terminator  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection to the ports (continued)  
LAN  
AUX I/O  
DC 5V 0.5A  
J
RGB  
OUT  
RB1  
RGB2  
M-D  
K
Q
R
L
M
N
O
P
A
2
AUDIN  
C/PR  
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
3
AUDIO IN  
4
CONTROL  
J
K
AUDIO IN 1, AUDIO IN 2  
Ø3.5 stereo mini jack  
• 500 mVrms 47kΩ terminator  
L
M
N
O
AUDIO IN 3 R, L, AUDIO IN 4 R,  
L
RCA jack x2  
• 500 mVrms 47kΩ terminator  
P
AUDIO OUT  
Ø3.5 stereo mini jack  
• 500 mVrms 1kΩ output impedance  
Q
REMOTE CONTROL  
Ø3.5 stereo mini jack  
To be connected with the remote control that came with the projector.  
R
CONTROL  
2
3
4
5
D-sub 9pin plug  
6
7
8
9
• About the details of RS-232C communication, please refer to the following page.  
Pin  
Signal  
(No connection)  
Pin  
4
Signal  
(No connection)  
Ground  
Pin  
7
Signal  
RTS  
CTS  
2
3
RD  
TD  
5
6
8
9
(No connection)  
(No connection)  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connection to the ports (continued)  
S
T
U
LAN  
AUX I/O  
DC 5V 0.5A  
RGB  
OUT  
RGB1  
RGB2  
M1-D  
Y
CB/PB  
VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO IN  
1
2
CR/PR  
L
REMOTE  
R
L
R
AUDIO  
OUT  
CONTROL  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
3
AUDIO IN  
4
CONTROL  
S
LAN  
RJ-45 jack  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin  
2
Signal  
TX+  
TX-  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
7
8
Signal  
4
5
6
-
-
-
-
3
RX+  
RX-  
T
AUX I/O  
USB A type jack  
Pin  
Signal  
+5V  
4
3
2
2
3
4
- Data  
+ Data  
Gtound  
U
SD card slot  
SD card slot  
Pin  
2
Signal  
CD/DAT 3  
CMD  
Pin  
4
5
Signal  
Pin  
7
8
Signal  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
9
VDD  
CLK  
VSS  
DAT 0  
DAT ꢀ  
DAT 2  
3
VSS  
6
9
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication  
RS-232C Communication  
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
6
6
8
8
7
9
7
9
CONTROL port  
of the projector  
RS-232C cable (Cross)  
RS-232C port  
of the computer  
- (ꢀ)  
RD (2)  
TD (3)  
- (4)  
(ꢀ) CD  
(2) RD  
(3) TD  
(4) DTR  
(5) GND  
(6) DSR  
(7) RTS  
(8) DTS  
(9) RI  
GND (5)  
- (6)  
RTS (7)  
CTS (8)  
- (9)  
Connecting the cable  
ꢀ. Turn off the projector and the computer.  
Connect the CONTROL port of the projector with a RS-232C port of  
the computer by a RS-232C cable (cross). Use the cable that fulfills the  
specification shown in the previous page.  
2.  
Turn the computer on, and after the computer has started up turn the  
projector on.  
3.  
Communications setting  
ꢀ9200bps, 8Nꢀ  
1. Protocol  
Consist of header (7 bytes) + command data (6 bytes).  
2. Header  
BE + EF + 03 + 06 + 00 + CRC_low + CRC_high  
CRC_low : Lower byte of CRC flag for command data  
CRC_high : Upper byte of CRC flag for command data  
3. Command data  
Command data chart  
byte_0  
byte_ꢀ  
byte_2  
byte_3  
high  
byte_4  
Setting code  
low  
byte_5  
high  
Action  
Type  
low  
high  
low  
Action (byte_0 - ꢀ)  
Action  
Classification  
Content  
2
4
5
6
SET  
GET  
Change setting to desired value.  
Read projector internal setup value.  
INCREMENT Increment setup value by ꢀ.  
DECREMENT Decrement setup value by ꢀ.  
EXECUTE  
Run a command.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Requesting projector status (Get command)  
(ꢀ) Send the request code Header + Command data (‘02H’+‘00H’+ type (2 bytes)+  
‘00H’ +‘00H’) from the computer to the projector.  
(2) The projector returns the response code ‘ꢀDH’+ data (2 bytes) to the computer.  
Changing the projector settings (Set command)  
(ꢀ) Send the setting code Header + Command data (‘0ꢀH’+‘00H’+ type (2 bytes) +  
setting code (2 bytes)) from the computer to the projector.  
(2) The projector changes the setting based on the above setting code.  
(3) The projector returns the response code ‘06H’ to the computer.  
Using the projector default settings (Reset Command)  
(ꢀ) The computer sends the default setting code Header + Command data (‘06H’+  
‘00H’ + type (2 bytes) +‘00H’+‘00H’) to the projector.  
(2) The projector changes the specified setting to the default value.  
(3) The projector returns the response code ‘06H’ to the computer.  
Increasing the projector setting value (Increment command)  
(ꢀ) The computer sends the increment code Header + Command data (‘04H’+  
‘00H’+ type (2 bytes) +‘00H’+‘00H’) to the projector.  
(2) The projector in creases the setting value on the above setting code.  
(3) The projector returns the response code ‘06H’ to the computer.  
Decreasing the projector setting value (Decrement command)  
(ꢀ) The computer sends the decrement code Header + Command data (‘05H’+  
‘00H’+ type (2 bytes) +‘00H’ + ‘00H’) to the projector.  
(2) The projector decreases the setting value on the above setting code.  
(3) The projector returns the response code ‘06H’ to the computer.  
When the projector cannot understand the received command  
When the projector cannot understand the received command, the error code ‘ꢀ5H’  
is sent back to the computer.  
Sometimes the projector cannot properly receive the command. In such a  
case, the command is not executed and the error code ‘ꢀ5H’ is sent back to the  
computer. If this error code is returned, send the same command again.  
When the projector cannot execute the received command.  
When the projector cannot execute the received command, the error code ‘ꢀCH’  
+ ‘xxxxH’ is sent back to the computer. When the data length is greater than  
indicated by the data length code, the projector ignore the excess data code.  
Conversely when the data length is shorter than indicated by the data length  
code, an error code will be returned to the computer.  
NOTE • Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined  
command or data.  
• Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code.  
• The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON, and when the  
lamp is lit. Ignore this data.  
• Commands are not accepted during warm-up.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Command Data  
Names  
Power  
Operation Type  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
Setting Code  
Set  
Set  
Turn off  
Turn on  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
2A D3  
BA D2  
19 D3  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
00 60  
00 60  
00 60  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
[Example return]  
00 00  
01 00  
[On]  
02 00  
[Cool down]  
[Off]  
Input Source  
RGB1  
RGB2  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
FE D2  
3E D0  
0E D2  
6E D3  
9E D3  
AE D1  
5E D1  
CD D2  
D9 D8  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
02 00  
00 20  
00 20  
00 20  
00 20  
00 20  
00 20  
00 20  
00 20  
20 60  
00 00  
04 00  
03 00  
01 00  
02 00  
05 00  
06 00  
00 00  
00 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
M1-D  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
MIU  
Get  
Error Status  
Get  
[Example return]  
00 00  
01 00  
[Cover error]  
05 00  
[Air flow error]  
09 00  
(Filter missing error)(Inner Sencer error)  
02 00  
[Fan error]  
06 00  
[Lamp time error]  
10 00  
03 00  
[Normal]  
[Lamp error]  
07 00  
04 00  
[Temp error]  
08 00  
[Cool error]  
[Filter error]  
BRIGHTNESS  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
89 D2  
EF D2  
3E D3  
58 D3  
FD D3  
9B D3  
4A D2  
A4 D2  
23 F6  
B3 F7  
E3 F4  
E3 EF  
73 EE  
83 EE  
10 F6  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 20  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
04 00  
20 00  
21 00  
22 00  
00 00  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
03 20  
03 20  
00 70  
04 20  
04 20  
04 20  
01 70  
BA 30  
BA 30  
BA 30  
BA 30  
BA 30  
BA 30  
BA 30  
BRIGHTNESS Reset  
CONTRAST  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
CONTRAST Reset  
PICTURE MODE  
Set  
NORMAL  
CINEMA  
DYNAMIC  
BOARD(BLACK)  
BOARD(GREEN)  
WHITEBOARD  
Get  
[Example return]  
00 00  
[Normal]  
20 00  
01 00  
[Cinema] [Dynamic] [Custom]  
21 00 22 00  
[BOARD(BLACK) ] [BOARD(GREEN)] [WHITEBOARD]  
04 00  
10 00  
GAMMA  
Set  
#1 DEFAULT  
#1 CUSTOM  
#2 DEFAULT  
#2 CUSTOM  
#3 DEFAULT  
#3 CUSTOM  
#4 DEFAULT  
#4 CUSTOM  
#5 DEFAULT  
#5 CUSTOM  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
07 E9  
07 FD  
97 E8  
97 FC  
67 E8  
67 FC  
F7 E9  
F7 FD  
C7 EB  
C7 FF  
F4 F0  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
A1 30  
A1 30  
A1 30  
A1 30  
A1 30  
A1 30  
A1 30  
A1 30  
A1 30  
A1 30  
A1 30  
20 00  
10 00  
21 00  
11 00  
22 00  
12 00  
23 00  
13 00  
24 00  
14 00  
00 00  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Command Data  
Names  
Operation Type  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
Setting Code  
User Gamma Pattern Set  
Off  
9 step gray scale  
15 steps gray scale  
Ramp  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
FB FA  
6B FB  
9B FB  
0B FA  
C8 FA  
08 FE  
6E FE  
BF FF  
F4 FF  
92 FF  
43 FE  
B0 FF  
D6 FF  
07 FE  
4C FE  
2A FE  
FB FF  
38 FF  
5E FF  
8F FE  
C4 FE  
A2 FE  
73 FF  
80 FE  
E6 FE  
37 FF  
7C FF  
1A FF  
CB FE  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
80 30  
80 30  
80 30  
80 30  
80 30  
90 30  
90 30  
90 30  
91 30  
91 30  
91 30  
92 30  
92 30  
92 30  
93 30  
93 30  
93 30  
94 30  
94 30  
94 30  
95 30  
95 30  
95 30  
96 30  
96 30  
96 30  
97 30  
97 30  
97 30  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
Get  
User Gamma Point 1  
User Gamma Point 2  
User Gamma Point 3  
User Gamma Point 4  
User Gamma Point 5  
User Gamma Point 6  
User Gamma Point 7  
User Gamma Point 8  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
COLOR TEMP  
Set  
LOW  
MID  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
6B F4  
9B F4  
0B F5  
3B F2  
AB F3  
AB F9  
5B F9  
CB F8  
FB FF  
6B FE  
C8 F5  
34 F4  
52 F4  
83 F5  
70 F4  
16 F4  
C7 F5  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
B0 30  
B0 30  
B0 30  
B0 30  
B0 30  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
08 00  
09 00  
11 00  
12 00  
13 00  
18 00  
19 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
HIGH  
Hi-BRIGHT-1  
Hi-BRIGHT-2  
CUSTOM-LOW  
CUSTOM-MID  
CUSTOM-HIGH  
B0 30  
B0 30  
B0 30  
B0 30  
B0 30  
B0 30  
B1 30  
B1 30  
B1 30  
B2 30  
B2 30  
B2 30  
CUSTOM-Hi-BRIGHT-1 BE EF  
CUSTOM-Hi-BRIGHT-2 BE EF  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
COLOR TEMP GAIN R  
COLOR TEMP GAIN G  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
ꢀ0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Command Data  
Names  
Operation Type  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
Setting Code  
COLOR TEMP GAIN B  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
8C F5  
EA F5  
3B F4  
04 F5  
62 F5  
B3 F4  
40 F5  
26 F5  
F7 F4  
BC F4  
DA F4  
0B F5  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
B3 30  
B3 30  
B3 30  
B5 30  
B5 30  
B5 30  
B6 30  
B6 30  
B6 30  
B7 30  
B7 30  
B7 30  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
COLOR TEMP  
OFFSET R  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
COLOR TEMP  
OFFSET G  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
COLOR TEMP  
OFFSET B  
Increment  
Decrement  
COLOR  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
B5 72  
D3 72  
02 73  
80 D0  
49 73  
2F 73  
FE 72  
7C D1  
F1 72  
97 72  
46 73  
C4 D0  
0E D7  
9E D6  
6E D6  
FE D7  
F2 D6  
62 D7  
92 D7  
02 D6  
4A 72  
DA 73  
2A 73  
79 72  
E6 70  
76 71  
86 71  
D5 70  
26 72  
D6 72  
46 73  
85 73  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
02 22  
02 22  
02 22  
0A 70  
03 22  
03 22  
03 22  
0B 70  
01 22  
01 22  
01 22  
09 70  
14 20  
14 20  
14 20  
14 20  
15 20  
15 20  
15 20  
15 20  
07 22  
07 22  
07 22  
07 22  
0A 22  
0A 22  
0A 22  
0A 22  
06 22  
06 22  
06 22  
06 22  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
COLOR Reset  
TINT  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Get  
TINT Reset  
SHARPNESS  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
1
SHARPNESS Reset  
MY MEMORY Load Set  
2
3
4
MY MEMORY Save Set  
1
2
3
4
PROGRESSIVE  
3D-YCS  
Set  
Set  
Set  
TURN OFF  
TV  
FILM  
Get  
TURN OFF  
MOVIE  
STILL  
Get  
VIDEO NR  
LOW  
MID  
HIGH  
Get  
ꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Command Data  
Names  
Operation Type  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
Setting Code  
Set  
4:3  
16:9  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
9E D0  
0E D1  
CE D6  
FE D1  
5E DD  
AD D0  
91 70  
F7 70  
26 71  
EC D9  
0D 83  
6B 83  
BA 82  
E0 D2  
F1 82  
97 82  
46 83  
1C D3  
49 83  
2F 83  
FE 82  
B5 82  
D3 82  
02 83  
68 D2  
91 D0  
0E 72  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
08 20  
08 20  
08 20  
00 00  
01 00  
09 00  
ASPECT  
14:9  
SMALL  
NORMAL  
Get  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
06 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
08 20  
08 20  
08 20  
09 22  
09 22  
09 22  
27 70  
00 21  
00 21  
00 21  
02 70  
01 21  
01 21  
01 21  
03 70  
03 21  
03 21  
03 21  
02 21  
02 21  
02 21  
04 70  
0A 20  
04 22  
04 22  
04 22  
04 22  
04 22  
04 22  
17 20  
17 20  
17 20  
11 22  
11 22  
11 22  
11 22  
11 22  
11 22  
11 22  
11 22  
12 22  
12 22  
12 22  
12 22  
12 22  
12 22  
12 22  
12 22  
02 00  
10 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
04 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
0A 00  
04 00  
05 00  
09 00  
02 00  
08 00  
07 00  
00 00  
0A 00  
04 00  
05 00  
09 00  
02 00  
08 00  
07 00  
00 00  
Get  
OVER SCAN  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Get  
OVER SCAN Reset  
V POSITION  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Get  
V POSITION Reset  
H POSITION  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Get  
H POSITION Reset  
H PHASE  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
H SIZE  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Execute  
AUTO  
H SIZE Reset  
AUTO ADJUST  
COLOR SPACE  
Set  
RGB  
9E 73  
6E 73  
FE 72  
CE 70  
3D 72  
4A D7  
DA D6  
79 D7  
A2 70  
C2 74  
52 75  
52 70  
62 77  
C2 71  
32 74  
31 76  
E6 70  
86 74  
16 75  
16 70  
26 77  
86 71  
76 74  
75 76  
SMPTE240  
REC709  
REC601  
Get  
Set  
Set  
COMPONENT  
SCART RGB  
Get  
COMPONENT  
AUTO  
C-VIDEO FORMAT  
NTSC  
PAL  
SECAM  
NTSC4.43  
M-PAL  
N-PAL  
Get  
Set  
AUTO  
S-VIDEO FORMAT  
NTSC  
PAL  
SECAM  
NTSC4.43  
M-PAL  
N-PAL  
Get  
ꢀ2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Command Data  
Names  
M1-D  
Operation Type  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
Setting Code  
Set  
Set  
Set  
NORMAL  
ENHANCED  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
3E D9  
AE D8  
0D D9  
5E D7  
CE D6  
0D D6  
A2 D6  
32 D7  
F1 D7  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
20 20  
20 20  
20 20  
10 20  
10 20  
10 20  
11 20  
11 20  
11 20  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
RGB 1  
RGB 2  
SYNC ON G OFF  
SYNC ON G ON  
Get  
SYNC ON G OFF  
SYNC ON G ON  
Get  
FRAME LOCK  
KEYSTONE V  
Set  
TURN OFF  
TURN ON  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
CB D6  
5B D7  
F8 D6  
B9 D3  
DF D3  
0E D2  
08 D0  
E9 D0  
8F D0  
5E D1  
98 D8  
0B 22  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
14 30  
14 30  
14 30  
07 20  
07 20  
07 20  
0C 70  
0B 20  
0B 20  
0B 20  
20 70  
04 33  
04 33  
04 33  
04 33  
00 33  
00 33  
00 33  
01 30  
01 30  
01 30  
01 30  
01 30  
60 20  
60 20  
60 20  
64 20  
64 20  
64 20  
63 20  
63 20  
63 20  
61 20  
61 20  
61 20  
62 20  
62 20  
62 20  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
10 00  
11 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
Get  
KEYSTONE V Reset  
KEYSTONE H  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
TURN OFF  
THEATER  
PRESENTATION  
Get  
KEYSTONE H Reset  
ACTIVE IRIS  
Set  
CB SF  
5B 2E  
38 22  
WHISPER  
MIRROR  
Set  
Set  
NORMAL  
WHISPER  
Get  
3B 23  
AB 22  
08 23  
NORMAL  
H:INVERT  
V:INVERT  
H&V:INVERT  
Get  
C7 D2  
57 D3  
A7 D3  
37 D2  
F4 D2  
CD CC  
AB CC  
7A CD  
FD CD  
9B CD  
4A CC  
89 CC  
EF CC  
3E CD  
31 CD  
57 CD  
86 CC  
75 CD  
13 CD  
C2 CC  
VOLUME-RGB1  
VOLUME-RGB2  
VOLUME-M1-D  
VOLUME-Video  
VOLUME-S-Video  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
ꢀ3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Command Data  
Names  
Operation Type  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
Setting Code  
VOLUME-Component  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
01 CC  
67 CC  
B6 CD  
45 CC  
23 CC  
F2 CD  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
65 20  
65 20  
65 20  
66 20  
66 20  
66 20  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
VOLUME – MIU  
Increment  
Decrement  
TREBLE-RGB1  
TREBLE-RGB2  
TREBLE-M1-D  
TREBLE-Video  
TREBLE-S-Video  
TREBLE-Component  
TREBLE – MIU  
BASS-RGB1  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
0D C8  
6B C8  
BA C9  
3D C9  
5B C9  
8A C8  
49 C8  
2F C8  
FE C9  
F1 C9  
97 C9  
46 C8  
B5 C9  
D3 C9  
02 C8  
C1 C8  
A7 C8  
76 C9  
85 C8  
E3 C8  
32 C9  
0D FB  
6B FB  
BA FA  
3D FA  
5B FA  
8A FB  
49 FB  
2F FB  
FE FA  
F1 FA  
97 FA  
46 FB  
B5 FA  
D3 FA  
02 FB  
C1 FB  
A7 FB  
76 FA  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
70 20  
70 20  
70 20  
74 20  
74 20  
74 20  
73 20  
73 20  
73 20  
71 20  
71 20  
71 20  
72 20  
72 20  
72 20  
75 20  
75 20  
75 20  
76 20  
76 20  
76 20  
80 20  
80 20  
80 20  
84 20  
84 20  
84 20  
83 20  
83 20  
83 20  
81 20  
81 20  
81 20  
82 20  
82 20  
82 20  
85 20  
85 20  
85 20  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
BASS-RGB2  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
BASS-M1-D  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
BASS-Video  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
BASS-S-Video  
BASS-Component  
Increment  
Decrement  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
ꢀ4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Command Data  
Names  
Operation Type  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
Setting Code  
BASS – MIU  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
85 FB  
E3 FB  
32 FA  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
86 20  
86 20  
86 20  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
Increment  
Decrement  
SRS WOW – RGB1 Set  
SRS WOW – RGB2 Set  
SRS WOW – M1-D Set  
SRS WOW – Video Set  
SRS WOW – S-Video Set  
SRS WOW – Component Set  
TURN OFF  
MID  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
FE FF  
9E FE  
0E FF  
CD FF  
CE FE  
AE FF  
3E FF  
FD FE  
BA FF  
DA FE  
4A FF  
89 FF  
02 FE  
62 FF  
F2 FE  
31 FE  
46 FE  
26 FF  
B6 FE  
75 FE  
32 FF  
52 FE  
C2 FF  
01 FF  
76 FF  
16 FE  
86 FF  
45 FF  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
90 20  
90 20  
90 20  
90 20  
94 20  
94 20  
94 20  
94 20  
93 20  
93 20  
93 20  
93 20  
91 20  
91 20  
91 20  
91 20  
92 20  
92 20  
92 20  
92 20  
95 20  
95 20  
95 20  
95 20  
96 20  
96 20  
96 20  
96 20  
00 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
00 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
00 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
00 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
00 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
00 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
00 00  
02 00  
03 00  
00 00  
HIGH  
Get  
TURN OFF  
MID  
HIGH  
Get  
TURN OFF  
MID  
HIGH  
Get  
TURN OFF  
MID  
HIGH  
Get  
TURN OFF  
MID  
HIGH  
Get  
TURN OFF  
MID  
HIGH  
Get  
SRS WOW – MIU  
Set  
TURN OFF  
MID  
HIGH  
Get  
MUTE  
Set  
Set  
TURN OFF  
TURN ON  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
46 D3  
D6 D2  
75 D3  
6E D5  
FE D4  
5D D5  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
02 20  
02 20  
02 20  
1C 20  
1C 20  
1C 20  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
SPEAKER  
TURN OFF  
TURN ON  
Get  
AUDIO - RGB1  
Set  
TURN OFF  
Audio1  
Audio2  
Audio3  
Audio4  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
FE DD  
6E DC  
9E DC  
0E DD  
3E DF  
CD DD  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
30 20  
30 20  
30 20  
30 20  
30 20  
30 20  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
04 00  
00 00  
ꢀ5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Command Data  
Names  
Operation Type  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
Setting Code  
AUDIO - RGB2  
Set  
Set  
Set  
Set  
TURN OFF  
Audio1  
Audio2  
Audio3  
Audio4  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
CE DC  
5E DD  
AE DD  
3E DC  
0E DE  
FD DC  
BA DD  
2A DC  
DA DC  
4A DD  
7A DF  
89 DD  
02 DC  
92 DD  
62 DD  
F2 DC  
C2 DE  
31 DC  
46 DC  
D6 DD  
26 DD  
B6 DC  
86 DE  
75 DC  
32 DD  
A2 DC  
52 DC  
C2 DD  
F2 DF  
01 DD  
76 DD  
E6 DC  
16 DC  
86 DD  
B6 DF  
B6 D0  
45 DD  
FF 32  
6F 33  
CC 32  
03 33  
93 32  
30 33  
47 33  
D7 32  
74 33  
FF 3D  
6F 3C  
CC 3D  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
34 20  
34 20  
34 20  
34 20  
34 20  
34 20  
33 20  
33 20  
33 20  
33 20  
33 20  
33 20  
31 20  
31 20  
31 20  
31 20  
31 20  
31 20  
32 20  
32 20  
32 20  
32 20  
32 20  
32 20  
35 20  
35 20  
35 20  
35 20  
35 20  
35 20  
36 20  
36 20  
36 20  
36 20  
36 20  
36 20  
36 20  
00 26  
00 26  
00 26  
01 26  
01 26  
01 26  
02 26  
02 26  
02 26  
30 26  
30 26  
30 26  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
04 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
04 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
04 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
04 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
04 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
04 00  
10 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
AUDIO - M1-D  
AUDIO - Video  
AUDIO - S-Video  
TURN OFF  
Audio1  
Audio2  
Audio3  
Audio4  
Get  
TURN OFF  
Audio1  
Audio2  
Audio3  
Audio4  
Get  
TURN OFF  
Audio1  
Audio2  
Audio3  
Audio4  
Get  
AUDIO - Component Set  
TURN OFF  
Audio1  
Audio2  
Audio3  
Audio4  
Get  
AUDIO – MIU  
Set  
TURN OFF  
Audio1  
Audio2  
Audio3  
Audio4  
MIU  
Get  
IR REMOTE Front  
IR REMOTE Rear  
IR REMOTE Top  
Set  
Set  
Set  
Off  
On  
Get  
Off  
On  
Get  
Off  
On  
Get  
IR REMOTE FREQ. Set  
NORMAL  
Off  
On  
Get  
ꢀ6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Command Data  
Names  
Operation Type  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
Setting Code  
IR REMOTE FREQ. Set  
HIGH  
Off  
On  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
03 3C  
93 3D  
30 3C  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
31 26  
31 26  
31 26  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
Get  
LANGUAGE  
Set  
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
DEUTSCH  
ESPAÑOL  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
F7 D3  
67 D2  
97 D2  
07 D3  
37 D1  
A7 D0  
57 D0  
C7 D1  
37 D4  
A7 D5  
37 DE  
57 D5  
C7 D4  
F7 D6  
67 D7  
97 D7  
07 D6  
C4 D3  
04 D7  
62 D7  
B3 D6  
DC C6  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
05 30  
15 30  
15 30  
15 30  
43 70  
00 00  
01 00  
02 00  
03 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
07 00  
08 00  
09 00  
10 00  
0A 00  
0B 00  
0C 00  
0D 00  
0E 00  
0F 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
ITALIANO  
NORSK  
NEDERLANDS  
PORTUGUÊS  
SVENSKA  
PУCCKИЙ  
SUOMI  
POLSKI  
TÜRKÇE  
Get  
MENU POSITION H  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
MENU POSITION H  
Reset  
MENU POSITION V  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
40 D7  
26 D7  
F7 D6  
A8 C7  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
06 00  
16 30  
16 30  
16 30  
44 70  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
Increment  
Decrement  
Execute  
MENU POSITION V  
Reset  
BLANK  
Set  
My Screen  
ORIGINAL  
BLUE  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
FB CA  
FB E2  
CB D3  
6B D0  
9B D0  
08 D3  
FB D8  
6B D9  
C8 D8  
CB CB  
0B D2  
9B D3  
38 D2  
3B EF  
AB EE  
08 EF  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
00 30  
00 30  
00 30  
00 30  
00 30  
00 30  
20 30  
20 30  
20 30  
04 30  
04 30  
04 30  
04 30  
C0 30  
C0 30  
C0 30  
20 00  
40 00  
03 00  
05 00  
06 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
20 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
ꢀ7  
WHITE  
BLACK  
Get  
BLANK On/Off  
START UP  
Set  
Set  
TURN OFF  
TURN ON  
Get  
My Screen  
ORIGINAL  
TURN OFF  
Get  
My Screen LOCK  
Set  
TURN OFF  
TURN ON  
Get  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Command Data  
Names  
Operation Type  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
Setting Code  
MESSAGE  
Set  
Set  
TURN OFF  
TURN ON  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
8F D6  
1F D7  
BC D6  
B6 D6  
26 D7  
85 D6  
08 86  
6E 86  
BF 87  
3B 89  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
02 00  
06 00  
02 00  
06 00  
17 30  
17 30  
17 30  
16 20  
16 20  
16 20  
10 31  
10 31  
10 31  
20 31  
20 31  
20 31  
90 10  
30 70  
A0 10  
40 70  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
AUTO SEARCH  
AUTO OFF  
TURN OFF  
TURN ON  
Get  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
TURN OFF  
TURN ON  
Get  
AUTO ON  
Set  
AB 88  
08 89  
LAMP TIME  
LAMP TIME Reset  
FILTER TIME  
Get  
C2 FF  
58 DC  
C2 F0  
98 C6  
Execute  
Get  
FILER TIME Reset  
Execute  
AUTO KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE  
Execute  
BE EF  
03  
06 00  
E5 D1  
06 00  
0D 20  
00 00  
AUTO KEYSTONE  
Set  
Set  
TURN OFF  
TURN ON  
Get  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
EA D1  
7A D0  
D9 D1  
3A 33  
FA 31  
CA 33  
6A 30  
5A 32  
AA 32  
9A 30  
FA 3E  
6A 3F  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
0F 20  
0F 20  
0F 20  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
00 00  
04 00  
03 00  
05 00  
02 00  
01 00  
06 00  
10 00  
11 00  
MY BUTTON-1  
RGB1  
RGB2  
M1-D  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
MIU  
INFORMATION  
AUTO KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE  
MY MEMORY  
PICTURE MODE  
FILTER RESET  
ACTIVE IRIS  
e-SHOT  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
9A 3F  
0A 3E  
3A 3C  
AA 3D  
5A 3D  
CA 3C  
3A 39  
09 33  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
00 36  
12 00  
13 00  
14 00  
15 00  
16 00  
17 00  
18 00  
00 00  
VOLUME +  
VOLUME -  
Get  
ꢀ8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C Communication (continued)  
Command Data  
Names  
Operation Type  
Header  
CRC  
Action  
Type  
Setting Code  
MY BUTTON-2  
Set  
RGB1  
RGB2  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
C6 32  
06 30  
36 32  
96 31  
A6 33  
56 33  
66 31  
06 3F  
96 3E  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
00 00  
04 00  
03 00  
05 00  
02 00  
01 00  
06 00  
10 00  
11 00  
M1-D  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
MIU  
INFORMATION  
AUTO KEYSTONE  
EXECUTE  
MY MEMORY  
PICTURE MODE  
FILTER RESET  
ACTIVE IRIS  
e-SHOT  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
BE EF  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
06 00  
66 3E  
F6 3F  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
02 00  
04 00  
05 00  
01 00  
01 00  
02 00  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
01 36  
07 30  
07 30  
07 30  
02 30  
02 30  
02 30  
12 00  
13 00  
14 00  
15 00  
16 00  
17 00  
18 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
00 00  
01 00  
00 00  
C6 3D  
56 3C  
A6 3C  
36 3D  
C6 38  
F5 32  
7C D2  
1A D2  
CB D3  
83 D2  
13 D3  
B0 D2  
VOLUME +  
VOLUME -  
Get  
MAGNIFY  
FREEZE  
Get  
Increment  
Decrement  
NORMAL  
FREEZE  
Set  
Get  
ꢀ9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P8r9oje4c4tor  
User’s Manual – Network Functions Section  
This section is only intended to explain Network Functions.  
• The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.  
The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in  
NOTE  
this manual.  
• The reproduction, transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not  
permitted without express written consent.  
Trademark acknowledgment  
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.  
All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.  
Due to the continual evolution of software, this guide and the associated  
programs will be continually updated. The upgrade will be provided free  
and will be provided by Hitachi. Please check the following web addresses  
to get the latest revisions.  
http://www.hitachi.us/digitalmedia  
or  
http://www.hitachidigitalmedia  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Contents  
Caution …………………………………………………………………………………… 3  
1. Main Functions ……………………………………………………………………… 5  
1.1 Live Mode ………………………………………………………………………… 5  
1.2 PC-LESS Presentation ………………………………………………………… 6  
2. Equipment connection and network setting …………………………… 8  
2.1 Required equipment preparation ……………………………………………… 8  
2.2 Network connection using “One-Click-Communication”  
function …………………………………………………………………………… 8  
2.3 Manual network connection setting – Wired LAN - ……………………… 10  
2.3.1 Equipments connection …………………………………………………… 10  
2.3.2 Network settings …………………………………………………………… 11  
2.3.3 “Internet Option” setting ………………………………………………… 14  
2.3.4 Check connection…………………………………………………………… 15  
2.4 Manual network connection setting – For wireless LAN - ……………… 16  
2.4.1 Preparation for wireless LAN connection ……………………………… 16  
2.4.2 Wireless LAN connection set up ………………………………………… 17  
2.5 Configuring and Controlling the projector via a web browser…………… 19  
2.5.1 Network Information ……………………………………………………… 22  
2.5.2 Network Settings …………………………………………………………… 23  
2.5.3 Port Settings ………………………………………………………………… 25  
2.5.4 Mail Settings ………………………………………………………………… 26  
2.5.5 Alert Settings ………………………………………………………………… 27  
2.5.6 Schedule Settings…………………………………………………………… 32  
2.5.7 Date/Time Settings ………………………………………………………… 34  
2.5.8 Security Settings …………………………………………………………… 36  
2.5.9 Projector Control …………………………………………………………… 38  
2.5.10 Projector Status …………………………………………………………… 41  
2.5.11 Network Restart …………………………………………………………… 41  
2.5.12 Logoff………………………………………………………………………… 41  
2.6 Utilize Web Remote Control …………………………………………………… 42  
3. How to use Projector software – Basics - ………………………………… 44  
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” ………………………………………………… 44  
3.1.1 Install “MIU Live Viewer” ………………………………………………… 44  
3.1.2 Software Installation Procedure ………………………………………… 45  
3.1.3 Explanation of “MIU Live Viewer” ……………………………………… 46  
3.1.4 Utilize “MIU Live Viewer” – Basic - ……………………………………… 50  
3.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Basic - …………………………………… 52  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced - ………………………………………………… 54  
4.1 Utilize “MIU Live Viewer” – Advanced - ……………………………………… 54  
4.1.1 Connect multiple PCs with one projector (Multiple PCs  
connection) ………………………………………………………………… 54  
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - ……………………………… 56  
4.2.1 Thumbnail display ………………………………………………………… 57  
4.2.2 Display in full screen ……………………………………………………… 59  
4.2.3 Slide show …………………………………………………………………… 61  
4.2.4 Directory display …………………………………………………………… 63  
4.2.5 “PC-LESS Presentation” error message ……………………………… 66  
4.3 Playlist ……………………………………………………………………………… 67  
4.4 Failure & Warning Alerts via E-mail………………………………………… 68  
4.5 Projector management via SNMP……………………………………………… 70  
4.6 Controlling the Projector via Scheduling …………………………………… 71  
4.7 e-SHOT (Still Image Transfer) Display………………………………………… 74  
4.8 Command Control via the Network …………………………………………… 75  
5. Troubleshooting …………………………………………………………………… 80  
6. Specifications ……………………………………………………………………… 82  
7. Warranty and After-sales service …………………………………………… 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution  
Caution  
[Restriction in terms of inserts or pulls memory card and wireless LAN card]  
Do not pull out the memory card and the wireless card while the power is on. The  
memory card can be pulled out only while the card access LED (Red) is off.  
CAUTION  
nThe accompanying 802.11g wireless LAN card uses the 2.4GHz radio frequency band. You  
do not need a radio license to use this card, but you should be aware of the following:  
lDO NOT USE NEAR THE FOLLOWING!  
• Microwave ovens  
• Industrial, scientific or medical devices  
• Designated low power radio stations  
• Premises radio stations  
Using the wireless LAN card near the above may result in radio interference, which in  
turn may result in a decrease in communication speed and even a complete loss of  
communication.  
lDepending on the location where you attempt to use the wireless LAN card, there may be  
interference with the radio waves, which may result in a decrease in communication speed  
and even a complete loss of communication. In particular, please be aware that using the  
wireless LAN card in locations where there is reinforced steel, other metals and concrete  
may interfere with radio communication.  
lAvailable Channels  
The wireless LAN card uses the 2.4GHz radio frequency band, but depending on the  
country or region you are in, you might be limited to the channels you can use. Please  
refer to the following table for confirming where and with what channels you may use the  
accompanying 802.11g wireless LAN card. Please consult with your dealer for countries  
not included in the table.  
Country or Region  
Japan  
Available Channel  
ꢀ to ꢀꢀ  
USA  
ꢀ to ꢀꢀ  
Taiwan  
ꢀ to ꢀꢀ  
Canada  
ꢀ to ꢀꢀ  
UK, Spain, Germany, Italy, Austria, Switzerland,  
Belgium, Sweden, Netherlands, Portugal,  
Denmark, Finland, Greece, Norway, France,  
Ireland, Luxembourg, Iceland  
ꢀ to ꢀꢀ  
lYou may not bring the wireless LAN card into countries not listed above as there is  
a possibility that use of the wireless LAN card in those countries could lead to an  
infringement of established radio laws.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Main functions  
1. Main functions  
1.1 Live Mode (Project images from PC  
)
The main function of MIU (Multi Information processing Unit) is the Live Mode.  
On Live Mode, the projector displays the screen appearing on the PC via network,  
supported by “MIU Live Viewer” (Fig.1.1.a).  
The “MIU Live Viewer” captures PC screen image using dedicated firmware  
“MIU Live Viewer” and sends it to projector through wired LAN or wireless LAN  
connection. (Refer to section 3 and 5 in detail.)  
Fig. 1.1.a “MIU Live Viewer” outlines (through wireless LAN connection)  
Fig. 1.1.b “MIU Live Viewer”  
One projector can be connected with up to 4 PCs using “MIU Live Viewer”.  
(Refer to section 4.1 in detail.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Main functions  
1.2 PC-LESS Presentation  
(Display the images stored in SD card/USB memory.)  
Other main function is “PC-LESS Presentation”. (Fig. 1.2.a) “PC-LESS  
Presentation” has 4 kinds of display modes.  
1) Thumbnail display: Display many stored images in SD card and USB memory  
at once. (From now on, it is called “memory card” as SD card and USB memory  
combined.)  
2) Display in full screen: Display 1 picture or moving picture in full screen.  
3) Slide show: Switch images with set intervals.  
4) Directory display: Display directories and files stored in memory card as listed.  
[Supported memory cards]  
-
-
SD card  
USB memory (USB memory type, USB Hard Disk and USB card  
reader type)  
ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢀ=ꢀ5&ꢀ?  
ꢀ2%ꢁ.'55  
ꢀ24'5'06#6+10  
ꢀ/'07  
+OCIGꢁꢂ  
+OCIGꢁꢈ  
+OCIGꢁꢉ  
+OCIGꢁꢂꢅ  
+OCIGꢁꢌ  
+OCIGꢁꢊ  
+OCIGꢁꢋ  
+OCIGꢁꢂꢂ  
+OCIGꢁꢎ  
+OCIGꢁꢍ  
+OCIGꢁꢇ  
+OCIGꢁꢂꢌ  
ꢀ5.+&'ꢀ5*19  
ꢀ56#46ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢂ  
ꢀ5612ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢇꢇꢇ  
ꢀ+06'48#.ꢀꢀꢂꢅ5  
ꢀ/1&'  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ10'ꢀ6+/'  
㪈㪇  
㪈㪈  
㪈㪉  
ꢀ2.#;  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢄ;'5  
'06'4  
Fig. 1.2.a “PC-LESS Presentation” outlines  
“PC-LESS Presentation” can be controlled via keypad on the Projector or IR  
Remote (refer 4.2 Utilize PC-LESS Presentation -Advanced).  
You can also use “Remote Control” as shown in fig. 1.2.b, which enables selecting  
images, switching pages and switching display modes. “Remote Control” also  
switches mode between “MIU Live Viewer” and “PC-LESS Presentation”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Main functions  
1.2 PC-LESS Presentation  
(Display the images stored in SD card/USB memory.) (Continued)  
Fig. 1.2.b Remote Control  
NOTE • There are following limitations for file name and directory name in  
PC-LESS Presentation.  
(1) The projector's language setting is Japanese.  
Only alpha-numeric characters and Japanese are supported.  
(2) The projector's language setting is not Japanese.  
Only alpha-numeric characters and Latin-1 characters are supported.  
• Data cannot be read correctly depending on the type of USB hard disk, USB  
memory and USB card reader.  
• When your USB hard disk can use a DC power supply adapter, please use it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.1 Required equipment preparation  
Followings are required for 1 projector and 1 PC connection. Multiple PC  
connection is described in section 4.1.  
Projector: 1 unit  
PC: 1 set (“MIU Live Viewer” installation is required for “MIU Live Viewer” usage.)  
IEEE802.g wireless LAN equipment is required.  
Depending on the type of wireless LAN card and PC you are using, the  
projector may not be able to communicate properly with your PC, even  
if the PC you are using is equipped with built-in wireless LAN function.  
To eliminate communication problems, please procure a Wi-Fi certified  
wireless LAN card.  
LAN cable (in case of wired connection): 1 piece * 1  
SD Wireless Network Card (in case of wireless connection): 1 unit * 2  
Memory card (in case of “PC-LESS Presentation” usage): 1 piece  
* 1: When a projector and a PC are connected, use CAT-5 LAN cable.  
* 2: Access point is required when wireless LAN connection is used as  
Infrastructure mode.  
2.2 Network connection using “One-Click-Communication”  
function  
This section explains how to connect network using “One-Click-Communication”  
function. This function makes PC and projector network connection very easy  
without complicated settings like IP address and SSID.  
* This function cannot be used when multiple PCs or multiple projectors are  
connected.  
* The system of Windows2000 Professional Service Pack 4 or Windows XP and  
the administrator authority are required to use “One-Click-Communication”  
function. (Administrator authority)  
* This function might not work depending on your used wireless LAN driver.  
If so, setup the connection manually. ( 10, 16 and refer to the User Manuals for  
your PC and wireless equipment.)  
[Wired LAN connection]  
1) When projector network settings such as IP address and subnet mask are  
changed, need to return to the projector factory default Network settings.  
qPress the menu button on remote control or the ▲/◄/►/▼ button on keypad.  
Then OSD menu will be displayed. If Easy Menu is displayed, change the  
menu to Advanced menu.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.2 Network connection using “One-Click-Communication” function  
(Continued)  
wSelect the MIU menu by using ▲/▼ button.  
ꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢂ5'.'%6  
ꢀ2+%674'  
ꢀ+/#)'  
ꢀ+0276  
.+8'ꢀ/1&'  
2%ꢃ.'55ꢀ24'5'06#6+10  
5'672  
Gꢃ5*16  
ꢀ5'672  
+0(14/#6+10  
5'48+%'  
ꢀ5%4''0  
ꢀ126+10  
ꢀ/+7  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07  
ePress the Reset key on remote control. Then Reset Menu will be displayed.  
/+7  
4'5'6  
%#0%'.  
rPress the ▲ button to reset the Network settings.  
NOTE • SSID, WEP KEY will be set to factory default settings.  
• If you like to set these items, please set again from WEB ( 19).  
2) Connect PC and projector using LAN cable to make it ready for communication.  
* In case of connecting with existing network, contact your network administrator.  
3) Start up “MIU Live Viewer”. Window appears in fig. 2.2.a. (Refer to section 3.1  
how to use “MIU Live Viewer”.)  
Fig. 2.2.a “MIU Live Viewer” initial window  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.2 Network connection using “One-Click-Communication” function  
(Continued)  
4) Click “One-Click” button in fig. 2.2.a. Projector is found. Then capture start  
button is pushed and real time display is started automatically.  
[Wireless LAN connection]  
1) When projector network settings such as IP address and subnet mask are  
changed, need to return to the projector factory default settings. ( 9)  
2) In case 802.11b/g wireless LAN device is built-in the PC, make the LAN valid  
and other network connections invalid. If wireless LAN device is not built in the  
PC, connect 802.11b/g wireless LAN device and install device driver to the PC.  
(Refer to the user guide for wireless LAN device details.)  
3) Start up “MIU Live Viewer”, then the window appears (shown in fig. 2.2.a).  
4) Click “One-Click” button as shown in fig. 2.2.a. Then projector will be found  
and the capture start button is activated then real time display is started  
automatically.  
2.3 Manual network connection setting – Wired LAN -  
When you need to set the original IP address and SSID other than factory default  
settings, need to set up network connection manually.  
This section explains how to set up network connection manually.  
2.3.1. Equipments connection  
At first, connecting projector and PC with wired LAN connection to check PC  
setting and connection. Next section explains PC settings.  
Connecting projector with network using LAN cable, and then set it ready to  
communicate with PC.  
* Connecting with existing network, contact network administrator.  
At last, turn on the projector. This is the end of Equipments connection.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.3 Manual network connection setting – In case of wired LAN - (Continued)  
2.3.2. Network settings  
This is the explanation of network connection settings for Windows XP and  
Internet Explorer.  
1) Log on to Windows XP as administrator authority. (*)  
2) Open “Control Panel” from “Start” menu.  
3) Open “Network and Internet Connections” in “Control Panel”. (Fig. 2.3.2.a)  
* Administrator authority is the account, which can access to all functions.  
Fig. 2.3.2.a “Network and Internet Connections” window  
4) Open “Network Connections”. (Fig. 2.3.2.b)  
Fig. 2.3.2.b “Network Connections” window  
ꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.3 Manual network connection setting – In case of wired LAN - (Continued)  
5) When more than 2 usable network devices exist, make only one device “valid”  
that you want to use and the rest of devices “invalid”. (In this case, “Local Area  
Connection” is selected.)  
6) Open “Local Area Connection Properties” window you use for network device.  
(Fig. 2.3.2.c)  
Fig. 2.3.2.c “Local Area Connection Properties” window  
7) Set used protocol as “TCP/IP” and open “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties”  
window.  
Fig. 2.3.2.d “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window  
8) Set IP address, subnet mask and default gateway for PC.  
ꢀꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.3 Manual network connection setting – In case of wired LAN - (Continued)  
[About IP address]  
Network address portion of PC IP address should be common with projector’s  
one but the PC total IP address should not be overlapped with other networked  
equipments.  
For example, projector initial settings are as follows.  
IP address: 192.168.1.10  
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0  
Therefore, specify PC IP address as follows.  
IP address: 192.168.1.xxx (xxx shows decimal number.)  
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0  
Select from 1 to 254 for “xxx” not duplicating with any other equipments. In this  
case, projector has “192.168.1.10” IP address, specify from 1 to 254 except 10 for  
PC.  
Projector IP address can be changed by using configuration utility. (Refer to  
section 2.5.)  
When DHCP server exists in network, it is possible to set using IP address, which  
is automatically assigned to projector.  
If projector and PC exist in the same network (i.e. network address is common),  
default gateway can be blank.  
* DHCP is abbreviation for “Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol” and the function  
to provide necessary setting for network like IP address from server to client.  
Server that has DHCP function is called DHCP server.  
* When projector and PC exist in different networks, default gateway setting is  
necessary. Contact network administrator in detail.  
ꢀꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.3 Manual network connection setting – In case of wired LAN - (Continued)  
2.3.3 “Internet Option” setting  
1) Click “Internet Options” in “Network and Internet Connections” window  
(Fig. 2.3.3.a) to open “Internet Properties” window. (Fig. 2.3.3.b)  
Click  
Fig. 2.3.3.a “Network and Internet Connections” window  
Click  
Fig. 2.3.3.b “Internet Properties” window  
2) Click “Connections” tab and then click “LAN settings” button to open “Local  
Area Network (LAN) settings”. (Fig. 2.3.3.c)  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.3 Manual network connection setting – In case of wired LAN - (Continued)  
Fig. 2.3.3.c “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings” window  
3) Uncheck all boxes in “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings” window. (Fig. 2.3.3.c)  
2.3.4 Check connection  
Check PC and projector are connected properly here. If it is not connected, check  
cable connections and settings are properly or not.  
1) Start browser in PC and specify following URL, then click “Go” button.  
URL: http://(Projector IP address) /  
For example, if projector IP address is 192.168.1.10, specify  
URL: http://192.168.1.10/  
2) After enter your ID and password, if Fig. 2.3.4 appears, it succeeds.  
Fig. 2.3.4 “Logon Menu”  
ꢀꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.4 Manual network connection setting – For wireless LAN  
By installing SD-Link11g card, PC and wireless LAN are able to communicate in  
both Ad-Hoc and Infrastructure modes.  
How to set up wireless LAN connection manually.  
2.4.1 Preparation for wireless LAN connection  
Fig. 2.4.1.a Without access point communication (Ad-Hoc)  
Fig. 2.4.1.b With access point communication (Infrastructure)  
* Ad-Hoc is one of the wireless LAN communication methods without having  
access point to communicate.  
* Infrastructure is one of the wireless LAN communication methods with having  
access point to communicate. If certain quantities of equipments are used, this  
mode is efficiently.  
If communicating with existing network, contact your network administrator.  
First, insert the SD wireless network card into SD Card slot ( Inserting an SD card  
and USB memory of the User's Manual - Operating Guide).  
Then, make PC ready for wireless communication.  
In case 802.11b/g wireless LAN device is built-in the PC, make it valid and make  
other network connections invalid. If wireless LAN device is not built-in the PC,  
connect 802.11b/g wireless LAN device and install device driver. (Refer to the  
user guide for PC and wireless LAN device for detail.)  
ꢀꢄ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.4 Manual network connection setting – For wireless LAN (Continued)  
2.4.2 Wireless LAN connection set up  
Using wireless LAN utility for Windows XP standard.  
Wireless LAN initial settings for the projector is as follows.  
Connection Control  
SSID  
Channel  
: Ad-Hoc  
: wireless  
: 1ch  
Encryption rating  
: None  
Communication speed: AUTO  
IP address  
: 192.168.1.10  
* You can change these settings as you want. Use configuration utility or menu to  
change. (Refer to section 2.5)  
1) Open ”Network Connections”. (Fig. 2.4.2.a)  
Fig. 2.4.2.a “Network Connections”  
2) Make wireless network connection “Valid” and other network devices “Invalid”.  
3) Open “Wireless Network Connection Properties”. (Fig. 2.4.2.b)  
Fig. 2.4.2.b “Wireless Network Connection Properties” window (1)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀꢅ  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.4 Manual network connection setting – For wireless LAN (Continued)  
4) Set used protocol as “TCP/IP” and open TCP/IP property. Set IP address and  
other settings as same as wired LAN connection set up. ( 12)  
5) Open “Wireless Networks” tab. (Fig. 2.4.2.c)  
Fig. 2.4.2.c “Wireless Network Connection Properties” window (2)  
6) Add check mark for “Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings”  
in “Wireless Network Connection Properties” window.  
7) Click “Add” button in “Preferred networks” section in “Wireless Network  
Connection Properties” window (Fig. 2.4.2.c) to open “Wireless Network  
Properties” window. (Fig. 2.4.2.d)  
Fig. 2.4.2.d “Wireless network Properties” window  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.4 Manual network connection setting – For wireless LAN (Continued)  
8) Set each item as follows.  
Network name (SSID): wireless  
Data encryption: Invalid (Default setting is invalid.)  
* This explanation meets the projector default setting. If access point is used or  
data encryption is used, if needs to change settings properly. Refer to PC or  
wireless LAN device user guide for detailed information.  
* If using the existing network via access point, contact your network administrator.  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser  
You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a PC  
that is connected to the same network.  
NOTE • Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher are required.  
• If JavaScript is disabled in your web browser configuration, you must enable  
JavaScript in order to use the projector web pages properly. See the Help files  
for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript.  
• If no operations are performed via a web browser for approx. 50 seconds the  
system will automatically log off. Please Re-log on to continue operations via a  
web browser.  
• After you logon, a small, blank window will appear behind the main operation  
window. Please do not close this small, blank window. If this window is closed,  
the system will automatically log off after certain period of time even if an  
operation is being performed.  
The small, blank window will close when the main operation window is closed.  
• The small, blank window may be considered a pop-up and be blocked if you  
are using Windows XP Service Pack 2, or using other security software.  
If Service Pack 2 blocks the window the following message will appear:  
"Pop-up blocked. To see this pop-up or additional options click here..."  
Please select "Temporarily Allow Pop-ups" or "Always Allow Pop-ups From This  
Site..." to allow the window to open.  
• It is recommended that all web browser updates be installed. It is especially  
recommended that all users running Internet Explorer on a Microsoft Windows  
version prior to Windows XP Service Pack 2 install security update Q832894  
(MS04-004) or the web browser interface may not be displayed correctly.  
And when using an older version of Internet Explorer, during operations the  
browser will log out after 50 seconds.  
ꢀꢆ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
When configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser, an ID and  
password are required. There are two types of IDs, Administrator IDs and User  
IDs. The following chart describes the differences between user and administrator  
IDs.  
Item  
Description  
Administrator ID User ID  
Displays the projector’s current  
network configuration settings.  
Network Information  
Displays and configures network  
settings.  
Network Settings  
Port Settings  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Displays and configures  
communication port settings.  
Displays and configures e-mail  
addressing settings.  
Mail Settings  
Displays and configures failure &  
warning alerts.  
Alert Settings  
Displays and configures schedule  
settings.  
Schedule Settings  
Date/Time Settings  
Security Settings  
Displays and configures the date and  
time settings.  
Displays and configures passwords  
and other security settings.  
Projector Control  
Controls the projector.  
Remote Control  
Controls the projector like IR remote.  
Displays and configures the current  
projector status.  
Projector Status  
Restarts the projector’s network  
connection.  
Network Restart  
N/A  
Below are the factory default settings for administrator IDs, user IDs and  
passwords.  
Item  
Administrator ID  
User ID  
ID  
Password  
<blank>  
Administrator  
User  
<blank>  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
Refer to the following for configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:  
1) Enter  
[http://192.168.1.10/] into the address  
bar of the web browser and the screen  
in Fig. 2.5.a will be displayed.  
2) Enter your ID and password and click  
[Logon].  
Fig. 2.5.a "Logon Menu"  
If the logon is successful either the Fig.2.5.b or Fig.2.5.c screen will be displayed.  
Fig. 2.5.b "Logon with administrator ID"  
Fig. 2.5.c "Logon with user ID"  
3) Click the desired operation or configuration item on the main menu located on  
the left-hand side of the screen (Fig. 2.5.b or Fig. 2.5.c).  
ꢁꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.1 Network Information  
All screen images displayed in this manual are  
screens of a logon using an administrator ID.  
Any administrator only functions will not be  
displayed when using a user ID. Refer to the  
descriptions in each table.  
Displays the projector’s current network configuration settings.  
Item  
Description  
Displays the DHCP configuration settings.  
Displays the current IP address.  
DHCP  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
MAC Ethernet  
MAC Wireless  
Displays the Subnet Mask.  
Displays the Default Gateway.  
Displays the Ethernet MAC address.  
Displays the Wireless LAN MAC address.  
Displays the network firmware time stamp. This information is only  
displayed when logged on using an administrator ID.  
Firmware Date  
Displays the network firmware version number. This information is  
only displayed when logged on using an administrator ID.  
Firmware Version  
Wireless CH  
Displays wireless LAN default channel. (Not Supported)  
Displays SD card slot status. (Not Supported)  
SD Card Status  
Displays wireless LAN connection speed. (Not Supported)  
NOTE • When you select wireless mode "AD-HOC", speed  
value is not true until the projector connect wireless LAN.  
Wireless Speed  
USB Status  
USB Power  
Displays USB-A port status. (Not Supported)  
Displays USB-A port supplying power or not. (Not Supported)  
ꢁꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.2 Network Settings  
Displays and configures network settings.  
Item  
NETWORK MODE  
IP Configuration  
DHCP ON  
Description  
Select Network mode "wired" or "wireless".  
Configures network settings.  
Enables DHCP.  
DHCP OFF  
Disables DHCP.  
IP Address  
Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled.  
Configures the Subnet Mask when DHCP is disabled.  
Configures the Default Gateway when DHCP is disabled.  
Configures the Projector name.  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
Projector Name  
SysLocation (SNMP)  
Configures the location to be referred to when using SNMP.  
Configures the contact information to be referred to when  
using SNMP.  
SysContact (SNMP)  
DNS Server Address  
Configures the DNS Server address.  
ꢁꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.2 Network Settings (Continued)  
Item  
Wireless Mode  
Mode  
Description  
Select "AD-HOC" or "Infrastructure".  
Select using channel between "1" and "11".  
NOTE • Depending on the country where you are  
the channels may vary. In addition, depending on the  
country or region where you are may be required to use  
a wireless LAN card that confirm to the standards in the  
respective country or region.  
CH  
(Communication  
channel)  
Speed  
(Communication speed)  
Select communication speed.  
Select data encryption method.  
Encryption  
Input WEP key, which has same length defined by WEP.  
When "64bit" or "128bit" is selected, input 10 characters or  
26 characters respectively. Only numbers from "0" to "9" and  
alphabets from "a" to "f" can be used.  
WEP Key  
Input WPA Passphrase. Available number of input characters  
is 8 to 63. Only alphabets, numbers and following symbols  
can be used.  
WPA Passphrase  
SSID  
!"#$%&'()*+,-./[¥]^_`{|}~  
Set SSID. Maximum number of input characters is 32. Only  
alphabets, numbers and following symbols can be used.  
!"#$%&'()*+,-./[¥]^_`{|}~  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the  
network connection. When the configuration settings are changed, you must  
restart the network connection. You can restart the network connection by  
clicking [Network Restart] on the main menu.  
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network  
administrator before setting server addresses.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.3 Port Settings  
Displays and configures communication port settings.  
Item  
Description  
Network Control Port1  
(Port:23)  
Configures command control port 1 (Port:23).  
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 23.  
Port open  
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required  
for this port.  
Authentication  
Network Control Port2  
(Port:9715)  
Configures command control port 2 (Port:9715).  
Port open  
Click the [Enable] check box to use port 9715.  
Click the [Enable] check box when authentication is required  
for this port.  
Authentication  
SNMP Port  
Port open  
Configures the SNMP port.  
Click the [Enable] check box to use SNMP.  
Configures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format.  
Configures the SMTP port.  
Trap address  
SMTP Port  
Port open  
Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function.  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the  
network connection. The network connection must be restarted when the  
configuration settings are changed. The network connection can be restarted  
using [Network Restart] on the main menu.  
ꢁꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.4 Mail Settings  
Displays and configures e-mail addressing settings.  
Item  
Description  
Click the [Enable] check box to use the e-mail function.  
Configure the conditions for sending email under [Alert  
Settings].  
Send Mail  
SMTP Server IP Address Configures the address of the mail server in IP format.  
Configures the sender e-mail address.  
The length of the sender e-mail address can be up to 255  
Sender E-mail address  
alphanumeric characters.  
Configures the e-mail address of up to five recipients. You  
can also specify [TO] or [CC] for each address. The length of  
the recipient e-mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Recipient E-mail address  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE You can confirm whether the mail settings work correctly using the  
[Send Test Mail] button.  
• If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network  
administrator before setting server addresses.  
ꢁꢄ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.5 Alert Settings  
Displays and configures failure & warning alerts.  
Item  
Cover Error  
Description  
Configures Cover Error alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
SNMP Trap  
Send Mail  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Text  
Fan Error  
Configures Fan Error alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
SNMP Trap  
Send Mail  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Configures the text of the e- mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Text  
ꢁꢅ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.5 Alert Settings (Continued)  
Item  
Lamp Error  
Description  
Configures Lamp Error alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
SNMP Trap  
Send Mail  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Text  
Temp Error  
Configures Temp Error alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
SNMP Trap  
Send Mail  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Text  
Air Flow Error  
SNMP Trap  
Configures Air Flow Error alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Send Mail  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Text  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.5 Alert Settings (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
Lamp Time Error  
Configures Lamp Time Error alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
SNMP Trap  
Send Mail  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Text  
Cool Error  
SNMP Trap  
Configures Cool Error alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Send Mail  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Text  
Filter Error  
SNMP Trap  
Configures Filter Error alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Send Mail  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Text  
ꢁꢆ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.5 Alert Settings (Continued)  
Item  
Other Error  
Description  
Configures Other Error alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
SNMP Trap  
Send Mail  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Text  
Schedule Execution Error Configures Schedule Execution Error alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
SNMP Trap  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Send Mail  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
Mail Subject  
characters.  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Text  
Lamp Time Alarm  
Alarm Time  
Configures Lamp Time Alarm alert settings.  
Configures the lamp time to alert.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
SNMP Trap  
Send Mail  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Text  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.5 Alert Settings (Continued)  
Item  
Filter Time Alarm  
Alarm Time  
Description  
Configures Filter Time Alarm alert settings.  
Configures the filter time to alert.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
SNMP Trap  
Send Mail  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters.  
Mail Text  
Transition Detector Alarm Configures Transition Detector Alarm alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
SNMP Trap  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this  
item.  
Send Mail  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
Mail Subject  
characters.  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters.  
Mail Text  
“CHANGE THE LAMP” is Configures alert settings for when “CHANGE THE LAMP” is  
displayed  
displayed.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
SNMP Trap  
Send Mail  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable e-mail alerts for this item.  
Configures the subject line of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the subject line can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Mail Subject  
Configures the text of the e-mail to be sent.  
The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric characters.  
Mail Text  
Cold Start  
Configures Cold Start alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
SNMP Trap  
Authentication Failure  
SNMP Trap  
Configures Authentication Failure alert settings.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts for  
this item.  
ꢂꢀ  
Click the [ApDpolyw]nlobaudttfroonmtWowswa.Svoemtahneuaslse.ctotimn.gAsll.Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.6 Schedule Settings  
Displays and configures schedule settings.  
Item  
Description  
Configures the daily schedule.  
Daily  
Schedule  
Schedule List  
Sunday  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable daily scheduling.  
Displays the current daily schedule.  
Configures the Sunday schedule.  
Schedule  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Sunday scheduling.  
Displays the current Sunday schedule.  
Schedule List  
Monday  
Configures the Monday schedule.  
Schedule  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Monday scheduling.  
Displays the current Monday schedule.  
Schedule List  
Tuesday  
Configures the Tuesday schedule.  
Schedule  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Tuesday scheduling.  
Displays the current Tuesday schedule.  
Schedule List  
Wednesday  
Configures the Wednesday schedule.  
Schedule  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Wednesday scheduling.  
Displays the current Wednesday schedule.  
Configures the Thursday schedule.  
Schedule List  
Thursday  
Schedule  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Thursday scheduling.  
Displays the current Thursday schedule.  
Schedule List  
Friday  
Configures the Friday schedule.  
Schedule  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Friday scheduling.  
Displays the current Friday schedule.  
Schedule List  
Saturday  
Configures the Saturday schedule.  
Schedule  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable Saturday scheduling.  
Displays the current Saturday schedule.  
Schedule List  
ꢂꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.6 Schedule Setting (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
Specific date No1  
Configures the specific date (No.1) schedule.  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.1)  
scheduling.  
Schedule  
Month/Day  
Schedule List  
Configures the Month and date.  
Displays the current specific date (No.1) schedule.  
Configures the specific date (No.2) schedule.  
Specific date No.2  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.2)  
scheduling.  
Schedule  
Month/Day  
Schedule List  
Configures the Month and date.  
Displays the current specific date (No.2) schedule.  
Configures the specific date (No.3) schedule.  
Specific date No.3  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.3)  
scheduling.  
Schedule  
Month/Day  
Schedule List  
Configures the Month and date.  
Displays the current specific date (No.3) schedule.  
Configures the specific date (No.4) schedule.  
Specific date No.4  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.4)  
scheduling.  
Schedule  
Month/Day  
Schedule List  
Configures the Month and date.  
Displays the current specific date (No.4) schedule.  
Configures the specific date (No.5) schedule.  
Specific date No.5  
Click the [Enable] check box to enable specific date (No.5)  
scheduling.  
Schedule  
Month/Day  
Set the Month and date.  
Schedule List  
Displays the current specific date (No.5) schedule.  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
ꢂꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.6 Schedule Setting (Continued)  
To add additional functions and events click the [Add] button and set the following  
items.  
Item  
Description  
Time  
Configures the time to execute commands.  
Configures the commands to be executed.  
Configures the parameters for power control.  
Command  
Power Parameter  
Input Source  
Parameter  
Configures the parameters for input switching.  
Display Image  
Parameter  
Configures the parameters for display of transfer image data.  
Click the [Register] button to add new commands to the Schedule List.  
Click the [Delete] button to delete commands from the Schedule List.  
2.5.7 Date/Time Settings  
Displays and configures the date and time settings.  
Item  
Current Date  
Description  
Configures the current date in Year/Month/Day format.  
Configures the current time in Hour:Minute:Second format.  
Current Time  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.7 Date/Time Settings (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
Click the [ON] check box to enable daylight savings time and  
set the following items.  
Daylight Savings Time  
Start  
Configures the date and time daylight savings time begins.  
Configures the month daylight savings time begins (1~12).  
Month  
Configures the week of the month daylight savings time  
begins (First, 2, 3, 4, Last).  
Week  
Day  
Configures the day of the week daylight savings time begins  
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).  
Hour  
Minute  
End  
Configures the hour daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 23).  
Configures the minute daylight savings time begins (0 ~ 59).  
Configures the date and time daylight savings time ends.  
Configures the month daylight savings time ends (1 ~ 12).  
Month  
Configures the week of the month daylight savings time ends  
(First, 2, 3, 4, Last).  
Week  
Day  
Configures the day of the week daylight savings time ends  
(Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat).  
Hour  
Configures the hour daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 23).  
Configures the minute daylight savings time ends (0 ~ 59).  
Minute  
Configures the time difference (hours:minutes).  
Set the same time difference as the one set on your PC. If  
unsure, consult your network administrator.  
Time difference  
Click the [ON] check box to retrieve Date and Time  
information from the SNTP server and set the following items.  
SNTP  
SNTP Server IP Address Configures the SNTP server address in IP format.  
Configures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time  
information from the SNTP server. (hours:minutes).  
Cycle  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection.  
The network connection must be restarted when the configuration settings are changed, The  
network connection can be restarted using [Network Restart] on the main menu.  
If you connect the projector to an existing network, consult a network administrator before setting server addresses.  
To enable the SNTP function, the time difference must be set.  
• The projector will retrieve DATE and TIME information from the timeserver  
and override time settings when SNTP is enabled.  
The Internal Clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time.  
ꢂꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.8 Security Settings  
Displays and configures passwords and other security settings.  
Item  
Description  
Administrator authority Configures the Administrator ID and Password.  
Configures the Administrator ID.  
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric  
Administrator ID  
characters.  
Configures the Administrator Password.  
The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Administrator  
Password  
Re-enter Administrator  
Password  
Re-enter the above password for verification.  
User authority  
Configures the User ID and Password.  
Configures the User ID.  
The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric  
characters.  
User ID  
Configures the User Password.  
The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
User Password  
Re-enter User  
Password  
Used to re-enter the above password for verification.  
ꢂꢄ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.8 Security Settings (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
Configures the Authentication Password for the command  
control.  
Network Control  
Configures the Authentication Password.  
The length of the text can be up to 16 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Authentication  
Password  
Re-enter Authentication  
Password  
Used to re-enter the above password for verification.  
Configures the community name if SNMP is used.  
SNMP  
Configures the community name.  
The length of the text can be up to 64 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Community Name  
FTP  
Configures the FTP user and password.  
Configures the user name. The length of the text can be up  
to ꢂꢁ alphanumeric characters.  
USER  
Configures the password. The length of the text can be up to  
ꢂꢁ alphanumeric characters.  
Password  
Re-enter Password  
Use to re-enter the above password for verification.  
Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the  
network connection. The network connection must be restarted when the  
configuration settings are changed. The network connection can be restarted  
using [Network Restart] on the main menu.  
ꢂꢅ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.9 Projector Control  
The items shown in the table below can be  
performed using the [Projector Control] menu.  
Select an item using the up and down arrow keys  
on the PC.  
Most of the items have a submenu.  
Refer to the table below for details.  
Controls the projector.  
Item  
Description  
Main  
Power  
Turns the power On/Off.  
Selects the input source.  
Input Source  
Picture Mode  
Blank On/Off  
Mute  
Selects the Picture Mode setting.  
Turns Blank On/Off.  
Turns Mute On/Off.  
Freeze  
Selects the Freeze setting.  
Controls the Magnify setting.  
Magnify  
Picture  
Brightness  
Contrast  
Adjusts the Brightness setting.  
Adjusts the Contrast setting.  
Selects the Gamma setting.  
Selects the Color Temp setting.  
Adjusts the Color setting.  
Gamma  
Color Temp  
Color  
Tint  
Adjusts the Tint setting.  
Sharpness  
Active Iris  
MyMemory Recall  
MyMemory Save  
Adjusts the Sharpness setting.  
Selects the Active Iris setting.  
Recalls the MyMemory data.  
Saves the MyMemory data.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.9 Projector Control (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
Image  
Aspect  
Selects the Aspect setting.  
Over Scan  
V Position  
H Position  
H Phase  
Selects the Over Scan setting.  
Adjusts the V Position.  
Adjusts the H Position.  
Adjusts the H Phase.  
H Size  
Adjusts the H Size.  
Auto Adjust  
Performs Auto Adjustment.  
Input  
Progressive  
Video NR  
Selects the progressive setting.  
Selects the Video NR setting.  
Selects the 3D-YCS setting.  
3D-YCS  
Color Space  
Component  
C-Video Format  
S-Video Format  
M1-D  
Selects the Color Space.  
Selects the Component terminal setting.  
Selects the Video Format setting.  
Selects the S-Video Format setting.  
Selects the M1-D setting.  
Frame Lock  
RGB in-1  
Enables/Disables Frame Lock.  
Selects the RGB1 input signal type.  
Selects the RGB2 input signal type.  
RGB in-2  
Setup  
Auto Keystone Execute Performs the Automatic keystone distortion correction.  
Keystone V  
Keystone H  
Whisper  
Adjusts the Vertical Keystone setting.  
Adjusts the Horizontal Keystone setting.  
Selects the Fan speed. (Normal or Whisper)  
Selects the Mirror status.  
Mirror  
ꢂꢆ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.9 Projector Control (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
Audio  
Volume  
Adjusts the Volume setting.  
Treble  
Adjust the Treble setting.  
Bass  
Adjusts the Bass setting.  
SRS WOW  
Speaker  
Selects the SRS WOW setting.  
Turns Speaker On/Off.  
Audio-RGB1  
Audio-RGB2  
Audio-M1-D  
Audio-Video  
Audio-S-Video  
Audio-Component  
Audio-MIU  
Assigns the Audio-RGB1 input terminal.  
Assigns the Audio-RGB2 input terminal.  
Assigns the Audio-M1-D input terminal.  
Assigns the Audio-Video input terminal.  
Assigns the Audio-S-Video input terminal.  
Assigns the Audio-Component input terminal.  
Assigns the Audio-MIU input terminal.  
Screen  
Language  
Selects the Language for the OSD.  
Adjusts the vertical Menu Position.  
Adjusts the horizontal Menu Position.  
Selects the Blank mode.  
Menu Position V  
Menu Position H  
Blank  
Startup  
Selects the Startup screen mode.  
Turns MyScreen Lock On/Off.  
MyScreen Lock  
Message  
Turns the Message function On/Off.  
Option  
Auto Search  
Auto Keystone  
Auto on  
Turns the Automatic signal search function On/Off.  
Turns the Automatic keystone distortion correction function On/Off.  
Turns the Auto on function On/Off.  
Configures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal  
is detected.  
Auto off  
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON1 buttons on the  
included remote control.  
My Button-1  
Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON2 buttons on the  
included remote control.  
My Button-2  
Auto Adjust  
Enables/Disables Auto Adjustment.  
Remote Receiv. Front Enable/Disable Remote Receiv. Front.  
Remote Receiv. Rear Enable/Disable Remote Receiv. Rear.  
Remote Receiv. Top  
Remote Freq. Normal Enable/Disable  
Remote Freq. High Enable/Disable  
Enable/Disable Remote Receiv. Top.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.5 Configuring and controlling the projector via a web browser (Continued)  
2.5.10 Projector Status  
Displays and configures the current projector status.  
Item  
Error Status  
Description  
Displays the current error status  
Lamp Time  
Filter Time  
Power Status  
Input Status  
Blank On/Off  
Mute  
Displays the usage time for the current lamp.  
Displays the usage time for the current filter.  
Displays the current power status.  
Displays the current input signal source.  
Displays the current Blank On/Off status.  
Displays the current Mute On/Off status.  
Displays the current Freeze On/Off status.  
Freeze  
2.5.11 Network Restart  
Restarts the projector’s network connection.  
Item  
Description  
Restarts the projector’s network connection in order to  
activate new configuration settings.  
Restart  
NOTE • Restarting requires you to re-log on in order to further control or  
configure the projector via a web browser.  
2.5.12 Logoff  
When logoff is clicked, the logon screen is displayed ( 21 : Fig. 2.5.a).  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.6 Utilize Web Remote Control  
You can use your Web browser to remote control the projector once the projector  
is properly configured and connected to your PC via the wireless LAN card or via  
wired LAN.  
NOTE • Do not attempt to control the projector with the projector's remote  
control and via your Web browser at the same time. Attempt to do so may  
causes a projector operational error.  
Open browser when it is possible to communicate with projector. Corresponding  
browser is Internet Explorer 5.5 or later.  
Specify http://(projector IP address)/ to start.  
For example, http://192.168.1.10/  
(Input this URL when IP address is not changed.)  
After start up, enter your ID and password, and click [Logon]. Following window  
appears as shown in fig. 2.6.a.  
Fig. 2.6.a Utility selection window for Web Remote Control  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Equipment connection and network setting  
2.6 Utilize Web Remote Control (Continued)  
Click “Remote Control” in this window to display Web Remote Control as shown in  
fig.2.6.b.  
The same operation as the  
bundled remote control will done.  
UP/LEFT/RIGHT/DOWN  
corresponds to ▲/◄/►/▼  
respectively.  
Each mode will be activated by  
clicking these buttons.  
• LIVE MODE  
• THUMBNAIL  
• SLIDE SHOW  
• DIRECTORY  
Fig. 2.6.b Web Remote Control  
NOTE • Web Remote Control does not support repeat function when it is kept  
clicking.  
• Since automatic repeat function is not available, click the button necessary  
times to reach your demand.  
• If you click the button continuously, some command will not be transferred.  
Wait for a while, and Click again.  
When the power button is pushed, a message comes up to confirm the operation.  
If you wish to turn it off, push OK, otherwise push CANCEL.  
PAGE DOWN and PAGE UP buttons on web remote control can not be used as  
mouse emulation function of the projector.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -  
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -  
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer”  
This section explains how to use the “MIU Live Viewer”.  
3.1.1. Install “MIU Live Viewer”  
In order to use the projector with a PC for Live Mode, you will first need to install  
the accompanying software on all the PCs you will be using.  
Minimum PC Hardware and Software Requirements  
• OS:  
Windows 2000 Professional Service Pack4,  
Windows XP Home Edition/Professional  
• Graphic Interface: DirectX 6.1a or higher; Video RAM 4MB or higher  
(8MB recommended)  
• CPU:  
• Display:  
Pentium III (600MHz or higher recommended)  
VGA 640x480 or higher (XGA 1024x768 recommended) 65,536  
simultaneous colors or higher  
NOTE • Set your PC’s resolution to XGA or less.  
• In some cases, Screen will not be displayed correctly like no displays larger  
than XGA portion.  
• Images might not been transmitted, caused by OS version or the driver  
software for Network Adaptor.  
It is highly recommended that OS and the driver should be updated to the latest.  
• Memory:  
64MB or higher (128MB or higher if using Windows XP)  
Available Hard Disk Space: 10MB or higher  
• Web browser:  
• CD-ROM drive  
Internet Explorer® (5.5 or higher)  
• PC with PC card slot (PCMCIA Type-II) interface and IEEE802.11g wireless  
LAN PC card or PC with USB Interface and IEEE802.11g wireless LAN USB  
adaptor.  
NOTE • Not required for PCs with built-in 802.11g wireless LAN.  
• Depending on the type of wireless LAN card and PC you are using, the  
projector may not be able to communicate properly with your PC, even if the  
PC you are using is equipped with built-in wireless LAN functionality.  
Should communication problems occur, please procure a Wi-Fi certified  
wireless LAN card.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -  
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)  
3.1.2. Software Installation Procedure  
1) Turn on the PC.  
2) Shut down all applications.  
3) Insert the accompanying CD-ROM into the  
PC's CD-ROM drive.  
4) After a moment, the Welcome to MIU Utilities  
Setup dialog will appear as shown on the right.  
Press Next.  
NOTE If the Welcome to MIU Utilities Setup dialog doesn't appear, proceed as  
follows:  
(1) Click on the Start button on the toolbar and select Run.  
(2) Enter E:\software\setup.exe and then press OK.  
If your CD-ROM drive is not drive E on your PC, you will need to  
replace E with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD-ROM  
drive.  
If software has been already installed, Uninstallation will be done. Click the cancel  
button, then uninstallation will be canceled. If you uninstalled the software by mis-  
operation, please re-install the software from first procedure.  
5) The License Agreement dialog appears. If you  
accept it, press the “Yes”.  
6) The Choose Destination Location dialog  
appears. Press Next.  
NOTE • The C:\Program Files\MIU_Utility folder will be created and the  
program will be installed into that folder.  
If you wish to install to a different folder, click Browse and select another folder.  
7) Confirm the program folder name.  
If MIU_Utility is okay, press Next to continue.  
If not, enter the desired folder name and then  
press Next.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -  
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)  
8) The Hardware Installation dialog appears.  
Press Continue Anyway.  
9) After a moment, installation will complete and  
the Setup Complete dialog will appear as  
shown on the right. Click Finish.  
This completes the software installation. Then  
your PC automatically restarts.  
(1) To confirm that the software as been  
properly installed, press the Start button on  
the toolbar, select All Programs and then  
select the MIU Utility folder.  
(2) MIU Live Viewer will appear in that folder if  
the installation was successful.  
3.1.3 Explanation of “MIU Live Viewer”  
Double click “LiveViewer.exe” to start up. Fig. 3.1.3.a appears on your screen.  
t
r
q
e
w
y
u
s
i
a
o
Fig. 3.1.3.a “MIU Live Viewer” Window  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -  
3.1 How to use “MIU MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)  
[“MIU Live Viewer” window: Fig. 3.1.3.a]  
1) “File” button  
Display file menu.  
2) “Help” button  
Display “MIU Live Viewer” information.  
3) Stop button  
Disconnect projector connection.  
4) Capture start button  
Start real time display.  
NOTE • Pictures are not displayed correctly when the start/stop buttons are  
clicked repeatedly.  
5) Minimize button  
Close “MIU Live Viewer” window and display “MIU Live Viewer” as icon on the  
task tray.  
6) “Option” button  
Display Option window.  
7) “Refresh” button  
Refresh the current PC network setting.  
8) “Exit” button  
Terminate “MIU Live Viewer”.  
9) “Find” button  
Search connectable projectors.  
10) “One-Click” button  
Connect projector and PC without network setting of the PC.  
11) “Enable Device”  
Display network-connectable projector list.  
NOTE • When Multi PC mode is not selected, if there is no other PC  
connected, the last image will be held on screen until getting out of Live Mode  
or turning the projector off.  
Thanks to the feature, the PC can be used to prepare the next presentation file  
or others without showing it on screen if the communication to the projector is  
turned off.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -  
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)  
[“Options” window]  
[“Generaltab, Fig. 3.1.3.b]  
Fig.3.1.3.b “Options”, “General” tab  
1) CPU Share  
Set up any capturing performance on the PC screen by using control bar  
Low (At the far left): Set this position when many CPU resources are required  
by applications other than “MIU Live Viewer”. This setting is not  
good for displaying frequently changed patterns due to decrease in  
screen refresh rate by “MIU Live Viewer” performance degrading.  
High (At the far right): Set this position when “MIU Live Viewer” requires many  
CPU resources. Screen refresh rate increases when “MIU Live  
Viewer” is used, but decreases the speed of other application  
speed.  
2) MultiPC Mode  
Select connected PC quantity from 1PC to 4PCs.  
3) Cursor Emulation  
Enabling this function “ON”, display cursor (pointer) prepared by this projector  
when cursor is not displayed on output screen. Take out check mark to make it  
“OFF” when PC and projector both cursors are displayed.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -  
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)  
[JPEG tab]  
Fig. 3.1.3.c “Options”, “JPEGtab  
1) JPEG Quality  
When “MIU Live Viewer” is used, it captures PC screen image. Then that is  
compressed as JPEG and sent to projector. By control bar in this tab, you can  
set compression rate.  
Low (At the far left, Low picture quality): Make JEPG compression rate high.  
Screen refresh interval becomes shorter due to low volume  
transferred data, but picture quality decreases.  
High (At the far right, High picture quality): Make JEPG compression rate  
low. Screen refresh interval becomes longer due to high volume  
transferred data, but picture quality increases.  
[Icon in task tray]  
To display “MIU Live Viewer” icon in task tray, click “Minimize” button in “MIU Live  
Viewer” window. The icon with yellow thunder mark shows that communication is  
connected, and it with red cross mark shows that it is disconnected. (Fig. 3.1.3.d  
shows while communication is disconnected.)  
Fig. 3.1.3.d Icon in task tray  
Double click “MIU Live Viewer” icon in task tray to display “MIU Live Viewer”  
window.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -  
3.1.4 Utilize “MIU Live Viewer” – Basic -  
This section explains basic of how to use “MIU Live Viewer” functions.  
• Before start up the MIU Live Viewer, you have to set the projector into LIVE  
MODE by either of following way.  
1) from Web Remote Control  
(1) Select LIVE MODE  
2) from OSD Menu  
(1) Set the port into MIU menu by remote control or Keypad.  
(2) Open the OSD Menu by pressing ▲/◄/►/▼ Keypad button on the projector  
or Menu button on remote control.  
(3) Select the LIVE MODE in MIU Menu, and press the ► button on Keypad on  
the projector or Enter button on remote control.  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢀꢀꢀꢂ5'.'%6  
ꢀ2+%674'  
ꢀ+/#)'  
ꢀ+0276  
.+8'ꢀ/1&'  
2%ꢃ.'55ꢀ24'5'06#6+10  
5'672  
Gꢃ5*16  
ꢀ5'672  
+0(14/#6+10  
5'48+%'  
ꢀ5%4''0  
ꢀ126+10  
ꢀ/+7  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07  
• After setting to the projector into LIVE MODE.  
1) Start “MIU Live Viewer”. If “MIU Live Viewer” installation is not completed,  
install it referring to 3.1.1 Install “MIU Live Viewer”.  
Fig. 3.1.4.a Screen after “MIU Live Viewer” starting up  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -  
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)  
2) Start Web Remote Control (refer to 2.6 Utilize Web Remote Control), and click  
“LIVE MODE” button on Web Remote Control to change projector mode to  
“MIU Live Viewer”. After changing, screen of the output monitor connected with  
projector turn all blue.  
3) Perform following operations on “MIU Live Viewer”  
(1) Click “Find” button to search communication available projector. If any  
projector is not found at “Enable Device” tab, try search again after referring  
section ꢁ.ꢁ.  
Display communication possible  
projector like this if available as a  
result of search.  
Fig. 3.1.4.b. Projector research result display (1)  
(2) When communication available projector is found at 1), click the found  
projector to select  
Click the projector line to connect.  
IP address appears in the upper  
column.  
Fig. 3.1.4.c Projector research result display (2)  
ꢃꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -  
3.1 How to use “MIU Live Viewer” (Continued)  
(3) Click Capture start button.  
Fig. 3.1.4.d Start capturing  
Based on the above operation, if captured picture of PC screen is displayed real  
time on monitor connected with projector, it is succeeded. Much easier to connect  
if you utilize “One-Click-Communication” function. (Refer to section 2.2.)  
This is basic usage. Refer to section 4.1 for further explanation of advanced MIU  
Live Viewer usage.  
3.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Basic -  
Explain basics of how to utilize “PC-LESS Presentation”.  
1) Save JPEG picture files into root directory in SD card or USB Memory. Insert  
SD card into SD slot on projector or insert USB memory into AUX I/O slot on  
projector (Inserting an SD card and USB memory of the User's Manual - Operating  
Guide).  
2) Connecting as network refer to section 3 and start the Web Remote Control.  
3) Click “THUMBNAIL” button on the Web Remote Control to change projector  
mode to “PC-LESS Presentation”. Then thumbnail appears.  
To remove the SD card or USB memory,  
4) Be sure to perform the REMOVE procedure using the SERVICE item in the  
MIU menu (MIU Menu of the User's Manual - Operating Guide). When an error  
dialog appears in the procedure, please re-perform the procedure after waiting  
for a while.  
5) When you remove the SD wireless network card, be sure to turn the projector off.  
6) Remove the SD card or USB Memory. For removing the SD card, remove the  
SD card slot cover before, and put the cover back after.  
ꢃꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. How to use Projector software – Basics -  
3.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” –Basic - (Continued)  
If thumbnail appears by above operation, it is succeeded. (Fig.3.2.a) This is basic  
usage. There are varieties of usage for “PC-LESS Presentation”. Refer to section  
4.2 for further detailed explanation.  
ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢀ=ꢀ5&ꢀ?  
ꢀ2%ꢁ.'55  
ꢀ24'5'06#6+10  
ꢀ/'07  
+OCIGꢁꢂ  
+OCIGꢁꢈ  
+OCIGꢁꢉ  
+OCIGꢁꢂꢅ  
+OCIGꢁꢌ  
+OCIGꢁꢊ  
+OCIGꢁꢋ  
+OCIGꢁꢂꢂ  
+OCIGꢁꢎ  
+OCIGꢁꢍ  
+OCIGꢁꢇ  
+OCIGꢁꢂꢌ  
ꢀ5.+&'ꢀ5*19  
ꢀ56#46ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢂ  
ꢀ5612ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢇꢇꢇ  
ꢀ+06'48#.ꢀꢀꢂꢅ5  
ꢀ/1&'  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ10'ꢀ6+/'  
㪈㪇  
㪈㪈  
㪈㪉  
ꢀ2.#;  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢀꢄ;'5  
'06'4  
Fig. 3.2.a Thumbnail display  
You can also activate “PC-LESS Presentation” from the OSD Menu.  
1) Open the OSD Menu from the Menu button on the remote control or ▲/◄/►/▼  
button on Keypad.  
2) Select “PC-LESS Presentation” on the MIU Menu. And press the Enter button  
on the remote control or ► button on Keypad. Then PC-LESS PRESENTATION  
Menu appears.  
ꢀ/'07ꢀ=4)$ꢁ?  
ꢀꢂ5'.'%6  
2%ꢀ.'55ꢁ24'5'06#6+10  
ꢁ6*7/$0#+.  
ꢁ5.+&'ꢁ5*19  
ꢀ2+%674'  
ꢀ+/#)'  
ꢀ+0276  
.+8'ꢀ/1&'  
2%ꢃ.'55ꢀ24'5'06#6+10  
5'672  
Gꢃ5*16  
ꢁ&+4'%64;  
ꢁꢁ  
ꢁ&+52.#;ꢁ5+<'  
ꢁ-';ꢁ%10(+)ꢂ  
ꢀ5'672  
+0(14/#6+10  
5'48+%'  
ꢀ5%4''0  
ꢀ126+10  
ꢀ/+7  
ꢀ'#5;ꢀ/'07  
3) Select THUMBNAIL on PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu. And press the Enter  
button on remote control or ► button on Keypad. Then thumbnail appears.  
Caution • Do not pull out memory card while file is accessed.  
• SDHC(4GB etc) SD memory is not supported. UP to 2GB.  
• Some SD memories and/or USB memories will not work correctly.  
• Security USB memory is not supported.  
ꢃꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.1. Utilize “MIU Live Viewer” – Advanced -  
This section explains how to connect multiple PCs.  
4.1.1. Connect multiple PCs with one projector (Multiple PCs  
connection)  
A projector can be connected with up to 4 PCs to display multiple windows.  
1
2
3
4
1
3
2
4
C
C
/
B P  
S
B
D
B
C
A
R
D
/
R P  
R
G
A
IO  
U
IN  
1
A
UX  
VI  
D
A
DI  
1
D
I/O  
5
EO  
U
O
C
D
I
N
V
IN  
0.5A  
S-  
2
VI  
D
R
G
EO  
B
L
A
IN  
N
2
R
IN  
G
B
C
A
O
C
UT  
O
N
TR  
O
A
U
D
L
IO  
O
U
T
U
SB  
Fig. 4.1.1.a Multiple PCs connection outline  
Followings are required for multiple PCs connection.  
- From 2 to 4 PCs (“MIU Live Viewer” installation is required to all  
PCs to connect.)  
- Projector: 1 unit  
- Straight LAN cable: Required qty*  
- Ethernet hub  
* It is required to make all wireless PCs enabling wireless communication when  
doing multiple PCs connection as wireless LAN connection. SD-Link11g card for  
projector is required. If it is communicated by Infrastructure mode, access point  
is necessary. (16)  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.1. Utilize “MIU Live Viewer” – Advanced - (Continued)  
[Connection]  
1) Connect all PCs and projector using LAN cables and hub as shown in fig.  
4.1.1.a. Connect projector and output monitor with RGB cable.  
2) Start up “MIU Live Viewer” in each PC. Check the IP address in PCs and  
confirm xxx of [192.168.1.xxx] in IP address is set different value in each PC.  
3) Click “Find” button in “MIU Live Viewer” and search projector.  
4) When projector is found, click “Option” button in “MIU Live Viewer”. Then open  
“General” tub and select the number of PCs to connect as MultiPC Mode. After  
selecting, click “Close” button.  
5) Click Capturing Start button.  
6) Repeat from 3) to 5) to all PCs.  
* Display screen priority  
In case of multiple PCs connection, priority is decided automatically comparing  
when each PC is connected. In each mode, priority is as shown in fig. 4.1.1.b.  
(Smaller number is prioritized.)  
ꢀ2%  
ꢁ2%U  
ꢂ2%U  
ꢃ2%U  
Fig. 4.1.1.b Priority in each mode  
Detailed conditions and specifications for priority are as follows.  
a) The priority is high the PC that connects later.  
b) When Multi PC Mode (2 to 4 PCs) is changed to 1 PC, changed 1 PC has  
highest priority.  
c) Multi PC Mode can be changed settings freely even the PC is communicating.  
d) When the lower number than connected PCs is selected, lower priority PC  
screens are not displayed, but connections with projector are kept.  
When more than 5 PCs are connected with projector, lower priority PC connection  
is disconnected.  
NOTE • When Multi PC is selected, if the screen resolution on one of PCs is  
changed, the PC will be given the top priority, so the mode (1 to 4PCs) set on  
the PC will be effective on the projector.  
• On Multi PC Mode, actual image resolution of each screen is 1/4 of the  
original, then small letters or lines might be hard to be illegible.  
It is recommended to use letters as large as possible. Or try manual H.Phase  
adjustment which might improve image quality.  
ꢃꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced -  
“PC-LESS Presentation” reads image data from memory cards inserted into SD or  
USB slot and perform followings.  
SD Memory and SD Wireless card can not be inserted at the same time.  
- Thumbnail display (Section 4.2.1)  
- Display in full screen (Section 4.2.2)  
- Slide show (Section 4.2.3)  
- Directory display (Section 4.2.4)  
ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢀ=ꢀ5&ꢀ?  
ꢀ2%ꢁ.'55  
ꢀ24'5'06#6+10  
ꢀ/'07  
+OCIGꢁꢂ  
+OCIGꢁꢈ  
+OCIGꢁꢉ  
+OCIGꢁꢂꢅ  
+OCIGꢁꢌ  
+OCIGꢁꢊ  
+OCIGꢁꢋ  
+OCIGꢁꢂꢂ  
+OCIGꢁꢎ  
+OCIGꢁꢍ  
+OCIGꢁꢇ  
+OCIGꢁꢂꢌ  
ꢀ5.+&'ꢀ5*19  
ꢀ56#46ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢂ  
ꢀ5612ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢇꢇꢇ  
ꢀ+06'48#.ꢀꢀꢂꢅ5  
ꢀ/1&'  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ10'ꢀ6+/'  
㪈㪇  
㪈㪈  
㪈㪉  
ꢀ2.#;  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢄ;'5  
'06'4  
Fig. 4.2.a Thumbnail display  
Fig. 4.2.b Display in full screen  
Fig. 4.2.c Slide show  
Fig. 4.2.d Directory display  
ꢃꢄ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)  
Following picture and movie files can be displayed.  
• JPEG (.jpeg, .jpg) * Progressive is not corresponded.  
• BMP (.bmp)  
• PNG (.png)  
• MPEG4 (.mp4) * Supported bit resolution rate is less than 1Mbps in Simple  
Profile.  
Supported resolution is less than VGA.  
Supported Audio format is only AAC.  
4.2.1 Thumbnail display  
Fig.4.2.1 shows thumbnail display. Click [THUMBNAIL] button in the Web Remote  
Control to display menu on the screen in order to make thumbnail display.  
You can also display thumbnail by remote control or keypad (53).  
Thumbnail Images  
ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢀ=ꢀ5&ꢀ?  
ꢀ2%ꢁ.'55  
ꢀ24'5'06#6+10  
ꢀ/'07  
Focused image  
+OCIGꢁꢂ  
+OCIGꢁꢈ  
+OCIGꢁꢉ  
+OCIGꢁꢂꢅ  
+OCIGꢁꢌ  
+OCIGꢁꢊ  
+OCIGꢁꢋ  
+OCIGꢁꢂꢂ  
+OCIGꢁꢎ  
+OCIGꢁꢍ  
+OCIGꢁꢇ  
+OCIGꢁꢂꢌ  
ꢀ5.+&'ꢀ5*19  
ꢀ56#46ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢂ  
ꢀ5612ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢀꢇꢇꢇ  
ꢀ+06'48#.ꢀꢀꢂꢅ5  
Thumbnail Menu  
ꢀ/1&'  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ10'ꢀ6+/'  
㪈㪇  
㪈㪈  
㪈㪉  
ꢀ2.#;  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢃꢀꢄ;'5  
'06'4  
Fig. 4.2.1. Thumbnail display  
ꢃꢅ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)  
Following operations can be accessible while thumbnail is displayed.  
▲/◄/►/▼  
Move cursor.  
Remote control/Keypad  
PAGE UP PAGE DOWN  
Switch pages.  
Remote control  
ENTER Remote control  
Display selected image in full screen.  
INPUT Keypad  
MENU Remote control Displays PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu.  
* These operations are not accessible while projector OSD menu is displayed.  
NOTE • Thumbnail display shows 12 pictures in 1 page as maximum.  
• It is not possible to change the input port by INPUT button when THUMBNAIL,  
SLIDE SHOW, or DIRECTORY is displayed.  
• Displays the projector Menu before changing the input port .  
• Select the right edge images and press the ► button, then thumbnail menu  
will be selected.  
• Some error Icons will be displayed in thumbnail.  
This file seems to be broken or not supported format.  
This file exists only in Playlist (67), but does not exist anywhere.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)  
4.2.2 Display in full screen  
Full screen display (fig.4.2.2) shows a full display image on the PC. To make Full-  
screen display, click [MENU] button in the Web Remote Control menu on the  
screen. When select [PC-LESS Presentation], then [Thumbnail] from the menu,  
click [ENTER] so that moves to be full-screen display.  
Full-screen Display  
Fig.4.2.2 Full-screen Display  
While displaying in full screen, following operation can be accessible from the  
Web Remote Control.  
• Rotate image 90 degrees clockwise or otherwise. Once image  
is rotated, it keeps the display image even though it is switched.  
(Thumbnail or slide show display) To return the original, rotating  
the image 360 degrees or erase play list in memory card. (Refer  
to section 4.3)  
• Moving the slide forward or backward.  
◄/►  
or  
▲/▼  
(Selected on KEY  
CONFIG. MENU 60)  
ENTER Remote control  
Displaying thumbnail.  
INPUT Keypad  
MENU Remote control Displays PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu.  
* These operations are not accessible while projector OSD menu is displayed.  
NOTE • It is not possible to change the input port by INPUT button of keypad  
when displaying the THUMBNAIL, SLIDE SHOW, or DIRECTORY.  
• Displays the projector Menu before changing the input port.  
• Image might not be displayed properly at the beginning or end of MP4 file  
playback.  
ꢃꢆ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)  
You can display the image file with your desired size.  
1) Select the DISPLAY SIZE in PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu.  
2) Press the Enter button on the remote  
2%ꢀ.'55ꢁ24'5'06#6+10  
control or ► button on the Keypad.  
ꢁ6*7/$0#+.  
ꢁ5.+&'ꢁ5*19  
ꢁ&+4'%64;  
ꢁꢁ  
ꢁ&+52.#;ꢁ5+<'  
ꢁ-';ꢁ%10(+)ꢂ  
3) Then DISPLAY SIZE menu appears.  
&+52.#;ꢀ5+<'  
4'#.  
014/#.  
(7..  
4) Select your desired DISPLAY SIZE.  
• REAL : Displays the image at original size.  
Displays the image at the center of screen if original size is smaller  
than the screen size.  
Displays only center of the image if original size is larger than the  
screen size.  
• NORMAL : Displays the image for the maximum size on the screen, and  
keeps original aspect.  
• FULL : Displays the image at the full size screen.  
Original aspect will be changed to full size display.  
The animation file is always played at VGA mode if resolution is larger than VGA.  
The animation file is always played at the center of screen if resolution is smaller  
than VGA.  
You can select the KEY configuration from 2 preset pattern assigned to ▲/▼/◄/►  
keys on Tumbnail or Directory mode.  
1) Select the KEY CONFIG. in PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu.  
2) Press ► button.  
-';ꢀ%10(+)ꢁ  
3) The KEY CONFIG. menu appears.  
Pattern A  
$#%-  
0':6  
$#%-  
0':6  
Pattern B  
4) Select the KEY CONFIG. pattern.  
• pattern A : ◄ : rotation to left  
► : rotation to right  
▲ : previous image ▼ : next image  
• pattern B : ◄ : previous image ► : next image  
▲ : rotation to right ▼ : rotation to left  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)  
4.2.3. Slide show  
Slide show (fig.4.2.3) displays a full screen image and move to the next interval.  
Click the “SLIDE SHOW” button in Web Remote Control, then Slide show will be  
played. Display time can be set by the Playlist (refer to section 4.3) and menu.  
Full-screen Display  
Fig. 4.2.3 Slide show  
Following operations are accessible while slide show is displayed.  
ENTER Remote control  
Display thumbnails.  
INPUT Keypad  
MENU Remote control Displays PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu.  
* These operations are not accessible while projector OSD menu is displayed.  
NOTE • It is impossible to change the input port by INPUT button if  
THUMBNAIL, SLIDE SHOW, or DIRECTORY is displayed.  
• Displays the projector Menu before changing the input port .  
• Images can be displayed when it is recorded in the Playlist.  
Image can not be displayed in the thumbnail if it is not recorded in the Playlist. (67)  
• The START #, STOP #, INTERVAL, and MODE are set by thumbnail menu  
once, this setting has more priority than the Playlist.  
• If you would like to release the priority, delete the slidemode.txt file from  
directory.  
• When SLIDE SHOW mode is set to ONE TIME, the last slide of the  
presentation will be held on screen till either of ENTER key the remote or  
INPUT key on the projector is pushed.  
ꢄꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)  
You can also play the Slide show with the projector Menu.  
Select “SLIDE SHOW” on PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu. And press the Enter  
button on the remote control or ► button on Keypad. Then Slide show will start.  
2%ꢀ.'55ꢁ24'5'06#6+10  
ꢁ6*7/$0#+.  
ꢁ5.+&'ꢁ5*19  
ꢁ&+4'%64;  
ꢁꢁ  
ꢁ&+52.#;ꢁ5+<'  
ꢁ-';ꢁ%10(+)ꢂ  
You can play the Slide show at your desired configuration.  
Configure the Slide Show items in THUMBNAIL.  
ꢀ2%ꢁ.'55  
ꢀ24'5'06#6+10  
ꢀ/'07  
1) START #  
2) STOP #  
3) INTERVAL : Set the interval Slide show.  
: Set the beginning number of Slide show.  
: Set the end number of Slide show.  
ꢀ5.+&'ꢀ5*19  
ꢀ56#46ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢄꢀꢂ  
ꢀ5612ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢄꢀꢅꢅꢅ  
ꢀ+06'48#.ꢀꢀꢂꢃ5  
4) MODE  
: Select the Slide show mode.  
ONE TIME : Play the Slide show one time.  
ENDLESS : Play the Slide show endless.  
: Play the Slide show.  
ꢀ/1&'  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ10'ꢀ6+/'  
5) PLAY  
ꢀ2.#;  
ꢄꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)  
4.2.4 Directory display  
Directory display (Fig.4.2.4) shows saved directories and files including  
undisplayable files in the memory card on the tree structure. Click the  
“DIRECTORY” button in the Web Remote Control, then the directory tree will be  
displayed. While displaying directory, preview picture of selected file is shown on  
the top left. In case of moving picture, initial flame is displayed as preview. Nothing  
is displayed in case of directories or undisplayable files. Displayable file can be  
played if “ENTER” is clicked when its file is selected.  
Select the directory and press the Enter button, then the files in the directory will  
be displayed in the thumbnail.  
Image display preview  
File information  
Tree structure  
directory  
Fig. 4.2.4 Directory display screen  
ꢄꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)  
Following operations can be accessible while directory is displayed.  
▲/▼  
Moving selected item upward or downward.  
Open the closed folder.  
Close the folder.  
PAGE UP PAGE DOWN  
Show undisplayed portion if the tree display is not fit inside the  
screen.  
Remote control  
Play displayable file. While directory is selected, thumbnail is  
displayed. It is not possible to play undisplayable file. Click  
“ENTER” while playing, so it returns to the directory display.  
ENTER Remote control  
INPUT Keypad  
MENU Remote control Displays the menu.  
* These operations are not accessible while projector OSD menu is displayed.  
NOTE • It is not possible to change the input port by INPUT button when  
THUMBNAIL, SLIDE SHOW, or DIRECTORY is displayed.  
• Displays the projector Menu before changing the input port .  
• Only alphanumeric characters can be used for directory name and file name.  
• This directory display is able to show up to 10 layers. Over 10 layers of files  
and folders can not be shown. Some files and directories are not displayed  
if there are too many. In this case, delete some files in the directory or some  
directories in the memory card.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)  
You can also display the directory with the projector Menu.  
Select “DIRECTORY” in PC-LESS PRESENTATION Menu. And press the Enter  
button on remote control or ► button on Keypad. Then directory will be displayed.  
2%ꢀ.'55ꢁ24'5'06#6+10  
ꢁ6*7/$0#+.  
ꢁ5.+&'ꢁ5*19  
ꢁ&+4'%64;  
ꢁꢁ  
ꢁ&+52.#;ꢁ5+<'  
ꢁ-';ꢁ%10(+)ꢂ  
[File information display]  
File information display shows following information.  
Displayable still image file  
- File format (JPEG, PNG and BMP)  
- Time stamp (When file is created)  
- File size (Size of File)  
- Image size (File resolution)  
Displayable moving image file  
- File format (MP4)  
- Time stamp (When the file is created)  
- File size (Size of File)  
- Movie size (File resolution)  
- Movie time (Play time)  
Undisplayable file  
- File format (Directory: Directory, Undisplayable file: File)  
- Time stamp (When file is created)  
- File size (Size of File)  
ꢄꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.2 Utilize “PC-LESS Presentation” – Advanced - (Continued)  
4.2.5 “PC-LESS Presentation” error message  
Error message is displayed at a specific condition while “PC-LESS Presentation”  
mode. It appears at the bottom and the gray area of screen.  
Fig. 4.2.5 “PC-LESS Presentation” error message  
“PC-LESS Presentation” error message list  
Error message  
Error content  
Display mode  
Display in full screen and slide  
show  
File not found  
Displayable file does not exist.  
Play list file has malfunction. (Over  
64kB file, over 1022 characters  
per line in file or linefeed code  
malfunction)  
Display in full screen and slide  
show  
Illegal Playlist file  
ꢄꢄ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.3 Playlist  
Playlist is a DOS format text file, which decides the order of displayed still image  
files or moving image files in the thumbnail or the slide show.  
Playlist file name is [imagelistdir.txt]. It is created in each folder when “PC-LESS  
Presentation” is displayed. The timing of playlist creation is when “PC-LESS  
Presentation” is displayed in the directory, which any playlist file does not exist.  
The playlist is created in the displayed directory.  
NOTE • Playlist can not be overwritten. Once it is created, data remains.  
Therefore, the image can not displayed if it is additionally saved to the memory  
card that is on the playlist. In order to see added picture file, delete playlist.  
Playlist is editable on the PC. Display time and rotation information at the slide  
show can be set based on specifying settings. Of course it is possible to make  
certain file image undisplayable in a playlist deleting 1 line relating to the file from  
playlist. Also, it is possible to see added picture image based on adding picture  
image file name and pass name of destination to save in playlist.  
[Example of adding image file] (Pass name/pass name/…/file name, display  
time, rotation information)  
images/photo1/img001.jpg  
images/photo1/img002.jpg, 2000  
images/photo1/img003.jpg, 500, rot1  
images/photo1/img004.jpg  
images/photo1/img005.jpg, 500, rot2  
The number after the extension is the slide show display time. It can be set  
between 0 and 999900. (ms) Least input increment is 100 ms. The end of display  
time means rotation information. 90 degrees clockwise rotation becomes rot1, rot2  
and rot3. (When no rotation, not specify or specify rot0.)  
Display time and rotation information should be used “,” for separation.  
Caution • Maximum characters for the playlist in 1 line at playlist is 1024  
including linefeed. If it exceeds, playlist becomes invalid and error.  
• Playlist maximum size is 64kB. If it exceeds, it becomes invalid.  
• Playlist can register up to 999 image files. If it exceeds, first 999 files can be  
utilized.  
• When image file is added to the memory card and be able to see on the screen,  
delete existing playlist in the memory card.  
ꢄꢅ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.4 Failure & Warning Alerts via E-mail  
The projector can automatically send an alert to specified e-mail addresses when  
the projector requires maintenance or has encountered an error.  
NOTE • Up to five e-mail addresses can be specified.  
• The projector may be not able to send e-mail if the projector suddenly loses  
power.  
Mail Settings ( 26)  
To use the projector’s e-mail function please configure the following items via a  
web browser.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10/:  
1) Enter [http://192.168.1.10] into the address bar of the web browser.  
2) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].  
3) Click [Port Settings] on the main menu.  
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SMTP Port.  
5) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the SMTP Port configuration  
settings have changed. Click [Network Restart] and configure the following  
items.  
6) Click [Mail Settings] and configure each item. Refer to the [Mail Settings]  
item in [Configuring and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser] for  
further information.  
7) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • Click the [Send Test Mail] button in [Mail Settings] to confirm  
that the e-mail settings are correct. The following mail will be delivered to the  
specified addresses.  
Subject line : Test Mail  
Text : Send Test Mail  
<Projector name>  
Date  
<Testing date>  
Time  
<Testing time>  
IP Address  
<Projector IP address>  
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
Mail Settings (Continued)  
8) Configure the Failure/Warning Alerts via E-mail settings. Click [Alert Settings]  
on the main menu.  
9) Select and configure each alert item. Refer to [Alert Settings] in [Configuring  
and Controlling the Projector via a Web Browser] for further information.  
10) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
Failure/Warning e-mails are formatted as follows:  
Subject line : <Mail title>  
<Projector name>  
Text  
: <Mail text>  
Date  
<Failure/Warning date>  
<Failure/Warning time>  
<Projector IP address>  
Time  
IP Address  
MAC Address <Projector MAC address>  
ꢄꢆ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.5 Projector management via SNMP  
When SNMP is enabled, the projector is able to send Failure/Warning Alerts to a  
specified PC.  
NOTE • It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network  
administrator.  
• SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor  
the projector via SNMP.  
SNMP settings ( 25)  
Configure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10/:  
1) Enter [http://192.168.1.10] into the address bar of the web browser.  
2) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].  
3) Click [Port Settings] on the main menu.  
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open the SNMP Port.  
Set the IP address to send the SNMP Trap to when a Failure/Warning occurs.  
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the SNMP Trap configuration  
settings have been changed. Click [Network Restart] and configure the  
following items.  
5) Click [Security Settings] on the main menu.  
6) Click [SNMP] and set the Community Name on the screen that is displayed.  
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the Community Name has been  
changed.  
• Click [Network Restart] and configure the following items.  
7) Configure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures/Warnings. Click  
[Alert Settings] on the main menu and select the Failure/Warning item to be  
configured.  
8) Click the [Enable] check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures/Warnings.  
Clear the [Enable] check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required.  
9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.6 Controlling the Projector via Scheduling  
The projector can be automatically controlled via scheduling.  
NOTE You can schedule the following control events: Power ON/OFF, Input  
Source and Transferred Image Display.  
• There are 3 types of Scheduling, 1) daily 2) day of the week 3) specific date.  
• The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1) specific date 2) day of the  
week 3) daily.  
• Up to five specific dates are available for scheduled events. Priority is given to  
those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled  
for the same date and time (e.g., ‘Specific day No. 1’ has priority over ‘Specific  
day No. 2’ and so on.  
• Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events.  
ꢅꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
Date/Time Settings ( 34)  
The Date/Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10/:  
1) Enter [http://192.168.1.10] into the address bar of the web browser.  
Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].  
2) Click [Date/Time Settings] on the main menu and configure each item.  
Refer to the [Date/Time Settings] item in [Configuring and Controlling the  
Projector via a Web Browser] for further information.  
3) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
NOTE • A Network Restart is required after the Daylight Savings Time or  
SNTP configuration settings have been changed.  
• The battery for the built in clock may be dead if the clock loses time even  
when the DATE and TIME have been set correctly. Replace the battery by  
following the instructions on replacing the battery.  
(Internal clock battery of the User's Manual - Operating Guid)  
• The Internal Clock’s time may not remain accurate. Using SNTP is  
recommended to maintain accurate time.  
ꢅꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
Schedule Settings ( 32)  
Schedule settings can be configured from a web browser.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:  
1) Enter [http://192.168.1.10/] into the address bar of the web browser.  
2) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].  
3) Click [Schedule Settings] on the main menu and select the required schedule  
item. For example, if you want to perform the command every Sunday, please  
select the [Sunday].  
4) Click the [Enable] check box to enable scheduling.  
5) Enter the Date (Month/Day) for specific date scheduling.  
6) Click [Add] and set the time, command and parameters and click [Add This  
Schedule] when you want to add a command.  
7) Click the [Delete] button when you want to delete a schedule.  
8) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
There are three types of scheduling.  
1) Daily: Perform the specified operation at a specified time every day.  
2) Sunday ~ Saturday: Perform the specified operation at the specified time on a  
specified day of the week.  
3) Specific Date: Perform the specified operation on the specified date and time.  
NOTE • In Standby mode the power indicator will flash green for approx. 3  
seconds when at least 1 “Power ON” schedule is saved.  
• When the schedule function is used, the power cord must be connected to  
the projector and the outlet and the power switch must be turned on, [ | ]. The  
schedule function does not work when the power switch is turned off, [¡] or  
the breaker in a room is tripped. The power indicator will lights orange or green  
when the projector gets is receiving the power.  
ꢅꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.7 e-SHOT (Still Image Transfer) Display  
The projector can display a still image that is transferred via the network.  
e-SHOT transmission requires an exclusive application for your PC. You can  
download it from the Hitachi web site (http://hitachi.us/digitalmedia). Refer to the  
manual for the application for instructions.  
Supported file types are JPG, BMP and PNG.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
4.8 Command Control via the Network  
You can configure and control the projector via the network using RS-232C  
commands.  
Communication Port  
The following two ports are assigned for the command control.  
TCP #23  
TCP #9715  
NOTE • Command control is not available via communication port (TCP  
#9716) that is used for the e-Shot transmission function.  
Command Control Settings ( 25)  
Configure the following items from a web browser when command control is used.  
Example: If the IP address of the projector is set to 192.168.1.10:  
1) Enter [http://192.168.1.10/] into the address bar of the web browser.  
2) Enter the Administrator ID and Password and click [Logon].  
3) Click [Port settings] on the main menu.  
4) Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network Control Port (Port: 23)] to use  
TCP #23. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting when  
authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.  
5) Click the [Enable] check box to open [Network Control Port (Port: 9715)] to  
use TCP #9715. Click the [Enable] check box for the [Authentication] setting  
when authentication is required, otherwise clear the check box.  
6) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings.  
ꢅꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
Command Control Settings (Continued)  
When the authentication setting is enabled, the following settings are required.  
(36)  
7) Click [Security Settings] on the main menu.  
8) Click [Network Control] and enter the desired authentication password. * See  
NOTE1.  
9) Click the [Apply] button to save the settings. * See NOTE2.  
NOTE1 • The Authentication Password will be the same for [Network Control  
Port1 (Port: 23)], [Network Control Port2 (Port: 9715)], and [Image Transfer  
Port (Port: 9716)].  
NOTE2 • The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the  
network. Restart the network when any configuration settings are changed.  
The network connection can be restarted using [Network Restart] on the main  
menu.  
ꢅꢄ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
Command format  
Command formats differ among the different communication ports.  
TCP #23  
You can use the RS-232C commands without any changes. The reply data format  
is the same as the RS-232C commands. However, the following reply will be sent  
back in the event of authentication failure when authentication is enabled.  
<Reply in the event of an authentication error>  
Reply  
Error code  
0x04 0x00  
0x1F  
TCP #9715  
Send Data format  
The following formatting is added to the header (0x02), Data length (0x0D),  
Checksum (1byte) and Connection ID (1 byte) of the RS-232C commands.  
Data  
length  
Connection  
Header  
RS-232Ccommand  
Checksum  
ID  
0x02  
0x0D  
13 bytes  
1 byte  
1 byte  
Header  
Data length  
RS-232C commands → RS-232C commands that start with 0xBE 0xEF (13 bytes)  
→ 0x02, Fixed  
→ RS-232C commands byte length (0x0D, Fixed)  
Check Sum  
→ This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower  
8 bits from the header to the checksum.  
→ Random value from 0 to 255 (This value is attached to  
the reply data)  
Connection ID  
ꢅꢅ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
Reply Data format  
The connection ID (the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending  
data format) is attached to the RS-232C commands reply data.  
<ACK reply>  
Connection  
Reply  
ID  
0x06  
1 byte  
<NAK reply>  
Connection  
ID  
Reply  
0x15  
1 byte  
<Error reply>  
Connection  
ID  
Reply  
0x1C  
Error code  
2 bytes  
1 byte  
<Data reply>  
Connection  
ID  
Reply  
Data  
0x1D  
2 bytes  
1 byte  
<Projector busy reply>  
Connection  
ID  
Reply  
Status code  
2 bytes  
0x1F  
1 byte  
<Authentication error reply>  
Authentication  
Reply  
Connection  
ID  
Error code  
0x1F  
0x04  
0x00  
1 byte  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Utilize projector – Advanced -  
Automatic Connection Break  
The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no  
communication for 30 seconds after being established.  
Authentication  
The projector does not accept commands without authentication success  
when authentication is enabled. The projector uses a challenge response type  
authentication with an MD5 (Message Digest 5) algorithm.  
When the projector is using a LAN, a random eight bytes will be returned if  
authentication is enabled. Bind this received 8 bytes and the authentication  
password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the  
commands to send.  
Following is a sample if the authentication password is set to “password” and the  
random eight bytes are “a572f60c”.  
1) Select the projector.  
2) Receive the random eight bytes “a572f60c” from the projector.  
3) Bind the random eight bytes “a572f60c” and the authentication password  
“password” and it becomes “a572f60cpassword”.  
4) Digest this bind “a572f60cpassword” with MD5 algorithm.  
It will be “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”.  
5) Add this “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde” in front of the commands and  
send the data.  
Send “e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde”+command.  
6) When the sending data is correct, the command will be performed and the  
reply data will be returned. Otherwise, an authentication error will be returned.  
ꢅꢆ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Troubleshooting  
5. Troubleshooting  
Reference  
Page  
Problem  
Likely Cause  
Things to Check  
Number  
The projector is not turned  
on.  
Is the projector's lamp on?  
*17  
*18  
No image  
The projector's input source Is the projector switched to  
isn't switched to MIU.  
MIU?  
Check both the PC  
and projector's network  
settings. If you change the  
projector's settings, turn off  
the projector's AC power  
and then turn it on again.  
If you simply put the  
projector in STANDBY  
power mode and then  
turn it on again, the new  
settings might not take  
effect.  
The PC and/or projector's  
network settings are not  
configured correctly.  
The projector  
that you want  
to connect to  
is nowhere  
to be found  
on the list  
8, 10, 16  
of available  
projectors  
• Bring the PC and  
projector closer together  
• Radio waves won't go  
through concrete and  
metal (steel doors, etc.)  
Weak radio signal  
Check the mode on MIU  
Menu to make sure that it is  
in the correct mode.  
Can't  
The Projector isn't in Live  
50  
48  
communicate Mode  
The projector isn't capable Try increasing the Capture  
of relaying dynamic images Performance priority level.  
such as PowerPoint®  
animation at full speed.  
It may improve the speed a  
little.  
The projected  
image is  
rather slow  
compared to  
that of the PC  
Try setting the image  
compression to "Low."  
being used for transferring The resolution will drop  
The compression rate  
48  
the images is too low.  
in quality, but it may help  
improve the speed.  
(continued on next page)  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Troubleshooting  
Reference  
Problem  
Likely Cause  
Things to Check  
Page  
Number  
Try setting the image  
compression to "High."  
You may experience a  
drop in speed.  
Lots of  
The compression rate  
interference in being used for transferring  
the images  
49  
the images is too high.  
Cursor of the PC and  
cursor of the projector  
are displayed coming in  
succession.  
Turn off the cursor  
Emulation of MIU MIU Live  
Viewer option.  
Two cursors  
appear  
48  
48  
Some PCs do not display  
the cursor in MIU MIU Live Emulation of MIU MIU Live  
Viewer.  
Turn off the cursor  
No cursor  
appears  
Viewer option.  
No information is  
shown after mass  
storage device is  
set on Thumbnail or set.  
Directory mode.  
Select either Thumbnail  
mode or Directory mode  
again, showing PC LESS  
Presentation Menu.  
The mode setting is not  
renewed after the device is  
53, 63  
*12  
The wireless LAN card isn't  
Insert the wireless LAN  
card that came with your  
projector into the module.  
inserted into the projector  
or the memory card is still  
inserted.  
Can't communicate  
Can't communicate  
There is closely another  
projector or other that has  
the same wireless setting.  
24  
*54  
Try changing of SSID and  
IP Address.  
The PC and/or projector's  
network settings are not  
configured correctly.  
Check both the PC  
and projector's network  
settings.  
11-13  
*12  
Remove the wireless LAN  
SD card from the projector  
(you can't use both wireless  
and wired LAN connections  
at the same time).  
The wireless LAN card is  
inserted into the projector.  
Others  
Communication between  
the projector and PC is not  
working well.  
- Information from the  
projector to PC is not  
correct or completed  
Try "MIU RESTART"  
in MIU SERVICE MENU.  
*58  
- The projector does not  
respond  
MIU Functions of the  
projector is not working  
well.  
- Image on screen is  
freezed  
* User's Manual - Operating Guide  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Specifications  
6. Specifications  
Item  
Product name  
Specifications  
Liquid crystal projector  
File format  
JPEG, PNG, BMP and MPEG4  
Dedicated PC application and Web browser  
TCP/IP, DHCP client and HTTP server  
μITORN4.0 compliance  
Control software  
Corresponding protocol  
Firmware OS  
Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11g)  
Network  
(Ad-Hoc and Infrastructure modes)  
Ethernet (100Base-TX/10Base-T)  
Security  
WEP(64/128bit), WPA-PSK/PSK2(TKIP/AES), SSID  
OS: Windows® XP Home Edition/ Professional  
Windows® 2000 Professional  
CPU: Pentium III 600MHz or more is suggested.  
Memory size: 64M bytes or mode,  
PC application  
128M bytes or more in case of XP  
operational environment Graphic I/F: DirectX 6.1 or later  
Video RAM: 4MB required (8MB recommended)  
HDD: 10MB  
CD-ROM drive  
Web browser: Internet Explorer 5.5 or later  
SD card  
SD card (Corresponding card is not confirmed yet.)  
C-guys SD-Link11g  
Wireless LAN card  
USB1.1 host mass storage class SBC/BOT type  
Following USB memories can be read/written.  
- USB memory type  
USB  
- Card reader type  
(Corresponding card is not confirmed yet.)  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Warranty and After-sales service  
7. Warranty and After-sales service  
If a problem occurs with the equipment, first refer to the “5. Troubleshooting” ( 80)  
section and run through the suggested checks. If this does not resolve the problem,  
contact your dealer or service company. They will tell you what warranty condition is  
applied.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio Visual Products  
2900 Dukane Drive  
St. Charles, Illinois 60174  
www.dukcorp.com/av  
Toll-free: 800-676-2487  
Fax: 630-584-5156  
e-mail: avsales@dukcorp.com  
#401-8944-00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Craftsman Log Splitter 24779452 User Manual
Creda Cooktop S830G User Manual
Curtis Freezer FRF452 User Manual
DVS Car Stereo System DSV 811 User Manual
Electro Voice Portable Speaker SH 1810 User Manual
EVGA Computer Hardware 132 LF E653 KR User Manual
Fisher Price Riding Toy P6831 User Manual
Gaggenau Carpet Cleaner VK 230 714 User Manual
Garland Range 36ER32 User Manual
Gefen Switch 2x1 DVI KVM Switcher User Manual